Mbs Training.unlocked

MBS Training Manual Help © 2011 Metal Building Software, Inc

MBS Training Manual Help © 2011 Metal Building Software, Inc All rights reserved. No parts of this work may be reproduced in any form or by any means - graphic, electronic, or mechanical, including photocopying, recording, taping, or information storage and retrieval systems - without the written permission of the publisher. Products that are referred to in this document may be either trademarks and/or registered trademarks of the respective owners. The publisher and the author make no claim to these trademarks. While every precaution has been taken in the preparation of this document, the publisher and the author assume no responsibility for errors or omissions, or for damages resulting from the use of information contained in this document or from the use of programs and source code that may accompany it. In no event shall the publisher and the author be liable for any loss of profit or any other commercial damage caused or alleged to have been caused directly or indirectly by this document. Compiled: December 2011

Contents

3

Table of Contents Foreword

0

Part I Set Up and Installation

11

1 Introduction ................................................................................................................................... 11 2 Minimum ................................................................................................................................... Computer Configuration 11 3 Printers ................................................................................................................................... and Plotters 11 4 Loading ................................................................................................................................... the Software 11 Autom ated Method .......................................................................................................................................................... 11 Manual Method .......................................................................................................................................................... 15

5 To Install ................................................................................................................................... the Hardware Lock 17 6 To Check ................................................................................................................................... or Advance the Date on the Hardware Lock 17 7 Setup................................................................................................................................... the Jobs Directory 18 8 MBS.INI ................................................................................................................................... File, C:\MBS\SYSTEM\MBS.INI 18 9 Directory ................................................................................................................................... Structure 37

Part II Overview of MBS Software Operations

39

1 Introduction ................................................................................................................................... 39 2 Starting ................................................................................................................................... MBS 39 3 Features ................................................................................................................................... on the MBS Screens 39 4 The ToolBar ................................................................................................................................... 39 Control Utilities Auto Des/Det/Dw g Database Reference Help

.......................................................................................................................................................... 40 .......................................................................................................................................................... 40 .......................................................................................................................................................... 42 .......................................................................................................................................................... 42 .......................................................................................................................................................... 42 .......................................................................................................................................................... 43 .......................................................................................................................................................... 46

5 Building ................................................................................................................................... Data Entry 49 6 Designing ................................................................................................................................... the Building 49 7 Detailing ................................................................................................................................... the Building 49 8 Preparing ................................................................................................................................... Erection Drawings 50 9 Preparing ................................................................................................................................... Shop Drawings 54 Standard Shop .......................................................................................................................................................... Draw ings 55 Fully Scaled Draw .......................................................................................................................................................... ings 56

10 Special ................................................................................................................................... Programs 56

Part III Entering the Building Data

59

1 To Start ................................................................................................................................... MBS Windows 59 2 Start Files ................................................................................................................................... 60 3 To Enter ................................................................................................................................... Building Data 60 To Activate Building .......................................................................................................................................................... Entry Menu 60 © 2011 Metal Building Software, Inc

4

MBS Training Manual Help Screen Layout.......................................................................................................................................................... and Operations 62 Input Screens.......................................................................................................................................................... 64 Shape .......................................................................................................................................................... 64 Shape ......................................................................................................................................................... 66 Building Shape ......................................................................................................................................... 66 Rigid Frame in Endw ......................................................................................................................................... all 67 Flush Wall ......................................................................................................................................... 68 Column Base Elevation ......................................................................................................................................... 69 Building Colors ......................................................................................................................................... 69 Bay Spacing ......................................................................................................................................................... 70 Rigid Frames ......................................................................................................................................................... 73 Interior Columns ......................................................................................................................................................... 77 Jack Beam......................................................................................................................................................... 80 Special Shape ......................................................................................................................................................... 83 Loads .......................................................................................................................................................... 85 Code, Loads ......................................................................................................................................................... 85 Building Code ......................................................................................................................................... 85 Building Loads ......................................................................................................................................... 90 Structural Code ......................................................................................................................................... 93 Wall Loads......................................................................................................................................................... 94 Additional Loads ......................................................................................................................................................... 96 Crane Loads ......................................................................................................................................................... 102 Crane Systems ......................................................................................................................................................... 105 Crane Systems ......................................................................................................................................... - Layout 106 Crane Support ......................................................................................................................................... 107 Crane Systems ......................................................................................................................................... - Detail 109 Crane Rail ......................................................................................................................................... 109 Crane Deflection......................................................................................................................................... Limits 110 Crane Systems ......................................................................................................................................... - Bracing 110 Runw ay Cranes ......................................................................................................................................................... 112 Deflection, ......................................................................................................................................................... Yields 118 Deflection Limits......................................................................................................................................... 118 Extension, Deflection ......................................................................................................................................... Limits 119 Steel Yield ......................................................................................................................................... 119 Stress Ratio ......................................................................................................................................... 119 Walls / Roof .......................................................................................................................................................... 120 Girts ......................................................................................................................................................... 120 Purlins ......................................................................................................................................................... 123 Roof Purlins ......................................................................................................................................... 124 Set Purlin Spacing ......................................................................................................................................... 125 Endw all Framing, ......................................................................................................................................................... Panels 127 Endw all Framing......................................................................................................................................... 128 Panels ......................................................................................................................................... 130 Insulation ......................................................................................................................................... 130 Wainscot......................................................................................................................................................... 131 Layout ......................................................................................................................................... 132 Framing Type ......................................................................................................................................... 134 Panels ......................................................................................................................................... 135 Trim ......................................................................................................................................... 136 Wind Framing ......................................................................................................................................................... 138 Wall - Left and Right ......................................................................................................................................... 139 Wall - Front and......................................................................................................................................... Back 141 Interior Column ......................................................................................................................................... 143 Roof ......................................................................................................................................... 144 © 2011 Metal Building Software, Inc

Contents

5

Soldier Column ......................................................................................................................................................... 146 Design/Detail ......................................................................................................................................................... 149 Design/Detail Options ......................................................................................................................................... 149 Roof Detail Options ......................................................................................................................................... 150 Base Detail Options ......................................................................................................................................... 150 Openings .......................................................................................................................................................... 151 Framed Openings ......................................................................................................................................................... 152 Wide Doors ......................................................................................................................................................... 156 Opening Layout......................................................................................................................................... 157 Opening Framing ......................................................................................................................................... 159 Strut Framing ......................................................................................................................................... 159 Opening Insulation ......................................................................................................................................... 160 Opening Panels ......................................................................................................................................... 161 Wide EW ......................................................................................................................................................... Openings 161 Layout ......................................................................................................................................... 162 Opening Framing ......................................................................................................................................... 162 Strut Framing ......................................................................................................................................... 162 Partial Walls ......................................................................................................................................................... 163 Extension / Canopies .......................................................................................................................................................... 166 Extension......................................................................................................................................................... / Canopies 166 Canopies/Extensions ......................................................................................................................................... 167 Gable Extensions ......................................................................................................................................... 170 Facia 1 ......................................................................................................................................................... 172 Location ......................................................................................................................................... 173 Facia 2 ......................................................................................................................................................... 176 Purlin/Girt ......................................................................................................................................... 178 Panels ......................................................................................................................................... 178 Gutters and Dow ......................................................................................................................................... nspouts 179 Trims ......................................................................................................................................... 180 Parapet ......................................................................................................................................................... 182 Layout ......................................................................................................................................... 183 Girts ......................................................................................................................................... 184 Back Panel ......................................................................................................................................... 185 Gutter and Dow......................................................................................................................................... nspouts 185 Trims ......................................................................................................................................... 186 Partition Walls .......................................................................................................................................................... 187 Layout, Framing ......................................................................................................................................................... 191 Bay Spacing ......................................................................................................................................................... 195 Girts ......................................................................................................................................................... 198 Panels, Colors ......................................................................................................................................................... 202 Framed Openings ......................................................................................................................................................... 204 Partial Walls ......................................................................................................................................................... 208 Intersections ......................................................................................................................................................... 211 Accessories.......................................................................................................................................................... 214 Light Panels ......................................................................................................................................................... 214 Roof Light Panels ......................................................................................................................................... 215 Wall Light Panels......................................................................................................................................... 216 Gutters, Doors ......................................................................................................................................................... 217 Gutters & Dow nspouts ......................................................................................................................................... 217 Walk Doors ......................................................................................................................................... 218 Calc Button - Gutter ......................................................................................................................................... 219 Liner Panels ......................................................................................................................................................... 221 Accessories ......................................................................................................................................................... 224 Additional Items ......................................................................................................................................... 224 © 2011 Metal Building Software, Inc

6

MBS Training Manual Help Accessory Items ......................................................................................................................................... 225 Acc. Estimate ......................................................................................................................................................... 226 Accessory Estimates ......................................................................................................................................... 226 Floors .......................................................................................................................................................... 227 Layout ......................................................................................................................................................... 227 Layout ......................................................................................................................................... 227 Clearance ......................................................................................................................................... 228 Decking ......................................................................................................................................................... 229 Decking ......................................................................................................................................... 229 Floor Reference......................................................................................................................................... 230 Panels ......................................................................................................................................... 231 Joists ......................................................................................................................................................... 232 Joists ......................................................................................................................................... 232 Locations ......................................................................................................................................... 233 Beams ......................................................................................................................................................... 234 Support Beams ......................................................................................................................................... 234 Locations ......................................................................................................................................... 235 Perimeter ......................................................................................................................................................... 236 Perimeter Beams......................................................................................................................................... 236 Columns ......................................................................................................................................................... 238 Columns ......................................................................................................................................... 238 Locations ......................................................................................................................................... 239 Openings......................................................................................................................................................... 241 Openings ......................................................................................................................................... 241 Loads ......................................................................................................................................................... 244 Loading ......................................................................................................................................... 244 Deflection Limits......................................................................................................................................... 245 Options ......................................................................................................................................................... 246 Detail ......................................................................................................................................... 246 Bracing ......................................................................................................................................................... 247 Bracing ......................................................................................................................................... 248

Part IV Designing the Building

250

1 Design ................................................................................................................................... Screen Layout 250 2 To Do ................................................................................................................................... the Design 250 3 To Use ................................................................................................................................... the Editor 250 4 Help................................................................................................................................... Files 252 5 Removing ................................................................................................................................... the Design Warnings 252 6 Checking ................................................................................................................................... Each Design Report 252

Part V Building Detailing and Drawings

255

1 Getting ................................................................................................................................... Started 255 2 Control ................................................................................................................................... Screens 255 3 To Detail ................................................................................................................................... the Building 256 4 To Make ................................................................................................................................... Shop Drawings 256 5 To Make ................................................................................................................................... Building Drawings 256 6 To Make ................................................................................................................................... Combined Drawings 257 7 To Plot ................................................................................................................................... the Drawings 257

© 2011 Metal Building Software, Inc

Contents

7

8 Outline ................................................................................................................................... for Checking a Building 257 9 How................................................................................................................................... To Check the Rigid Frame Detailing 257 10 How................................................................................................................................... To Check the Endwall Framing 258 11 How To Check Framing For: Roof, Sidewall, and Framed Openings ................................................................................................................................... 258 12 Detailing ................................................................................................................................... Methods 258 13 Detailing ................................................................................................................................... Parameters 258 14 How................................................................................................................................... To Check the Erection Drawings 259 15 How................................................................................................................................... To Make a Block File 259 16 How................................................................................................................................... To Make a Customized Title Block 259 17 How................................................................................................................................... To Check the Bill of Materials 259 18 How................................................................................................................................... To Set Up the Shipping List 260 19 Editing ................................................................................................................................... the Shipping List 260 20 How................................................................................................................................... To Enter Loose Clips into the Clip File 260 21 How................................................................................................................................... To Enter Welded Clips into the Clip File 260 22 How................................................................................................................................... To Set Up the Punch File 260 23 How................................................................................................................................... To Set Up the Accessory File 260 24 How................................................................................................................................... To Enter Building Trim into the Program 260 25 Cross-Reference ................................................................................................................................... File for the Shipping List 260 26 Three ................................................................................................................................... Dimensional Building Drawings 261

Part VI Building Cost

263

1 Building ................................................................................................................................... Cost 263 2 How................................................................................................................................... to Obtain Building Cost Reports 263 Cost Cost Cost Cost

from from from from

BOM .......................................................................................................................................................... 263 Cost .......................................................................................................................................................... Report 263 Shipping .......................................................................................................................................................... List 263 Managem .......................................................................................................................................................... ent Report 263

3 Data................................................................................................................................... Files Used in Cost/Price Calculations 263 DT_COST.SIZ.......................................................................................................................................................... File 263 DT_SUPLY.SIZ .......................................................................................................................................................... File 264 DT_PRICE.SIZ.......................................................................................................................................................... File 264 RF_COST.SIZ.......................................................................................................................................................... File 264

4 Ideas ................................................................................................................................... on Checking the Building Cost 264 5 Contract ................................................................................................................................... 264 6 Additional ................................................................................................................................... Cost/Price Features 264

Part VII Guidlines on Program Operation

267

1 Some ................................................................................................................................... Guide Lines on Program Operations 267 2 General ................................................................................................................................... Operation 267 3 Change ................................................................................................................................... an Item in the Design Control Input File 267 4 Change ................................................................................................................................... in Any Program Input File 267


8

MBS Training Manual Help 5 Change ................................................................................................................................... in a Design Build Parameter 267 6 Change ................................................................................................................................... in a Detailing Parameter 267

Part VIII A1: How to Make Block Files for MBS Programs

269

1 How................................................................................................................................... to Convert a Pre-Drawn Drawing to MBS BLK Format 269 2 How................................................................................................................................... To Make Block Files for MBS Programs 275

Part IX A2: Obtaining a Renew Code for a MBS Hardware Lock

278

1 Obtaining ................................................................................................................................... a Renew Code for a MBS Hardware Lock 278

Part X A3: Keyboard Operation

281

1 MBS................................................................................................................................... Function Keys 281 2 MBS................................................................................................................................... Hot Keys 284

Part XI A4: Steps to Start a MBS Job and Source of Data

288

1 Steps ................................................................................................................................... to Start an MBS Job and Source of Data 288 Design Control .......................................................................................................................................................... 288 Job Id .......................................................................................................................................................... 289 Database .......................................................................................................................................................... 290 Draw ing Control .......................................................................................................................................................... 291

Part XII A5: Training Outline

293

1 Day ................................................................................................................................... 1: Building Entry and Building Design 293 2 Day ................................................................................................................................... 2: Detailing, Building Cost, Price, and Erection Drawing 294 3 Day ................................................................................................................................... 3: Drawings, Detailing II, Shipping List 295 4 Day ................................................................................................................................... 4: Special Topics 296 5 Training ................................................................................................................................... Outline for MBS Software 297

Part XIII A6: Description of MBS Sub-Directories

299

1 Description ................................................................................................................................... of MBS Subdirectories 299 BLK Directory .......................................................................................................................................................... 299 CODE Directory .......................................................................................................................................................... 299 DOC2 Directory .......................................................................................................................................................... 299 DXF Directory.......................................................................................................................................................... 300 ERRORS Directory .......................................................................................................................................................... 301 EXE2 Directory .......................................................................................................................................................... 301 EXEWIN1 Directory .......................................................................................................................................................... 301 FONTS Directory .......................................................................................................................................................... 301 HLP Directory .......................................................................................................................................................... 301 HLPWIN1 Directory .......................................................................................................................................................... 301 LIB Directory.......................................................................................................................................................... 301 MINIVIEW Directory .......................................................................................................................................................... 302 NOT Directory .......................................................................................................................................................... 302 © 2011 Metal Building Software, Inc

Contents

9

PROJECTS Directory .......................................................................................................................................................... 302 REP Directory.......................................................................................................................................................... 302 REPORTS Directory .......................................................................................................................................................... 303 SIZ2 Directory .......................................................................................................................................................... 303 SYSTEM Directory .......................................................................................................................................................... 303 TRANS Directory .......................................................................................................................................................... 304 UTIL Directory .......................................................................................................................................................... 304

Part XIV A7: MBS Directory Structure and File Sequence

308

1 MBS................................................................................................................................... Directory Structure and File Sequence 308 2 Data................................................................................................................................... Flow While Running MBS 309 3 File ................................................................................................................................... Execution Sequence, Design Screen 310 4 File ................................................................................................................................... Execution Sequence, Detail Screen 311

Part XV A8: MBS Install Instructions

313

1 MBS................................................................................................................................... Install Instructions 313

Part XVI A9: Information on the MBS Software

316

1 Information ................................................................................................................................... on the MBS Software 316 2 MBS................................................................................................................................... "Pass Through" Building Features (9-20-05) 317 3 MBS................................................................................................................................... Processing of MBMA Complexity Buildings 318

Part XVII A10: Creating and Checking the BOM Check Files

322

1 Creating ................................................................................................................................... and Checking the BOM Check Files 322

Part XVIII A11: How to Access and Download Files from the FTP Site

324

1 How................................................................................................................................... To Access and Download Files from the MBS FTP Site 324 2 How................................................................................................................................... To Access and Download using the MBS FTP_Updater 324

Part XIX A12: Continued MBS Support

328

1 Continued ................................................................................................................................... MBS Support 328

Part XX A13: Using the ADD Feature

330

1 Using the Add feature to Process a Main Building with Sidewall Lean-To ................................................................................................................................... Building 330

Part XXI A14: Using the COPY Feature

333

1 Using ................................................................................................................................... the Copy feature to Process Multiple Buildings 333

Index


0

Part

I

Set Up and Installation

1


1.1

Introduction

11

The two major steps in setting up the MBS software is to first load the MBS files into the computer, and second, to set up the MBS software to work with the available peripherals. The peripherals include printers, plotters, and electronic drafting systems. Loading the software will be covered in this manual, Section 1.4. Detailed software setup is covered in Sections 1.5 through 1.8.

1.2

Minimum Computer Configuration Any system capable of running MS Windows 2000, XP and Vista. Because of holes in the memory manager in the MS Windows 95, 98, and ME, these operating systems will no longer be supported. Large hard drives are preferred, since each very large building fully processed can require over one megabyte of hard disk space even in a compressed mode. A 17-inch or larger screen is recommended for drafting personnel.

1.3

Printers and Plotters The program will generate a large number of drawings. This includes both shop drawings and building drawings. Drawings can be output to any device with Windows Drivers, such as a printer or plotter. Common paper sizes are letter, 11" x 17" (A3) and roll sheet plotter output. To obtain efficiency in the detailing and/or drafting operations, it is essential to have printers and plotters that will produce, in a batch mode, a large number of drawings in a short time. A software product, MINIVIEW, is provided to permit the user to print/plot drawings while in MBS. That is, it is not necessary to move to an electronic drafting program to view or print the drawings. The MiniView for Windows program has been replaced by the MBS DXF viewer. The program is called DXFView.exe and is located in the MBS\EXEWIN1 folder on the MBS FTP site.

1.4

Loading the Software This section provides advice on loading MBS into Windows. There are two methods of installing on a MBS user's computer. The Automated method allows an install CD to configure your computer without much user interaction. The Manual method requires a computer that currently has MBS and refers to copying files, installing third party software, and setting operating system environment variables. We suggest using the Automated method.

1.4.1

Automated Method The installation process of the MBS install CD disk is quite easy. Just follow the steps below to install. A.1After turning the computer on and getting into Windows, insert the CD into the CD drive. If your computer has the Auto-Notification turned on, the MBS install wizard will begin automatically and you may skip Step C. A.2On the CD is a file called SETUP.EXE, which needs to be executed to install the MBS software. Click on the Start button and then on Run. When a dialog box appears (see below), enter: D:\INSTALLS\SETUP.EXE where D is the drive letter of the CD and click ok.


12

MBS Training Manual Help

A.3From the MBS install wizard, select Install MBS Software then Install Full Version. The following items are the names of the screens shown when installing the software and what should be pressed/clicked or selected. * Note: Please read the information on each screen. This information is necessary to customize your setup. a) Welcome screen press Next. b) Pre-Installation screen press Next. c) Choose Install Type screen select Complete. d) Installation Directory screen press Next. e) Ready to Install screen press Finish A.4The install program copies and creates the MBS directories and sub-directories on the C:\ drive. When finished, a screen will prompt you that the first phase of the install is complete. a) Last Minute Notes to remember… screen press Next b) Finished screen press Finished B. The Comprehensive Report program (CompRep) will need to be installed. From the Install MBS Software screen, select Install MBS Comprehensive Report. The installation of this program is optional. Just follow the prompts until done and you will be returned back the Install MBS Software screen. (Do not restart the computer until all installations are completed). C. Translation Editor (TDF Editor) program is next to install. From the Install MBS Software screen, select Install TDF Editor. The install is quite simple. Just follow the prompts and you will be returned back to the Install MBS Software screen. D. Visual Parameter Editor (VPE) program is next to install. From the Install MBS Software screen, select Install Visual Parameter Editor. The install is quite simple. Just follow the prompts and you will be returned back to the Install MBS Software screen. Click Back and then select Install Other Software. E. Next, install MiniView for Windows. c) Click Install MiniView d) The Welcome screen is displayed. Press Next. e) Software License Agreement screen. Press the Yes button. f) User Information screen. Enter your name, company information, and serial number (use 630047) as indicated below. Then press Next.



13

g) Next, MiniView requires a specific directory for installation. The default directory is C:\MBS\MINIVIEW. Press Next. h) Setup Type screen. Select Typical for this screen and press Next. i) Select Program Folder screen. Use the highlighted value and press Next. j) MINIVIEW for Windows will then be installed using the information you entered. Next you will be prompted to view the Read Me file and/or run MINIVIEW. After you check your preference, press Finish. If neither is checked, you will be returned to the MBS Main install menu. F. The Borland Database Engine (BDE) is second to last to install. This software package merges into your operating system and allows MBS to access the many dbf files that needed to run MBS. This package is need for the TDF Editor, the Visual Parameter Editor, and the Comprehensive Reports program. G. The last software package that needs to be installed is the hardware lock software. k) Return to Install Other Software screen of Install CD. l) Choose Install Az-Tech Software. m) Choose either 2.22 or 2.31 versions. Version 2.22 is for Parallel port hardware locks only. n) The Welcome screen is displayed. Press Next. o) Software License Agreement screen. Press the Accept button. p) Once the Next button is clicked, SETUP32 installs the needed drivers and support files for the lock software. q) SETUP32 then asks if you would like to restart your computer? You must restart before using MBS. The lock software has copied files into the SYSTEM directory that are required by MBS. Click Finish to restart. r) Verify that the KECHK32.DLL (and KECHK2.DLL if installing version 2.22) file is © 2011 Metal Building Software, Inc

14


contained in the C:\MBS\LIB directory. H. The MBS program requires environment variables be set to run properly. With the install CD, the environment variables should be updated automatically. The Windows operating system version dictates how these variables are set. For Win 95 / Win 98 / ME, environment variables can be defined at computer start up by using SET command lines in the AUTOEXEC.BAT file. The Install CD will add the following three lines to the AUTOEXEC.BAT file when these operating systems are detected: SET DOS4G=QUIET SET MVWINI=1 PATH=%PATH%;C:\MBS ** Important .. With the need for better memory management, MBS does not run on any Windows operating system that is older than Windows 2000. For Win NT/ Win 2000 / Win XP, environment variables and system variables are defined by adding the variable and its value using a variable registry interface. This interface is accessed by clicking START, Settings, Control Panel, and select the System icon and the Advanced tab. On the Advanced tab, select Environment Variables. After clicking on Environment Variables, a screen will appear similar to below.

In the System Variable window, select New… A screen like below will appear. © 2011 Metal Building Software, Inc


Enter

Variable Name: DOS4G Variable Value: QUIET

15

(no longer used)

Then click Ok. Select New… again and Enter

Variable Name: MVWINI Variable Value: 1

(optional)

Then click Ok. You will see the screen like at top of this page. Click on the PATH variable to highlight your current PATH settings. Then click the Edit… button. After doing that, you should see a screen appear similar to the one below.

Make sure to add ;C:\MBS to the beginning UNLESS it is already in the PATH statement. You may have to search the Variable Value entry box to see if MBS is in the PATH. If it is or you have added it to the value then click Ok. On the Environment Variables screen, click Ok to return to the System window of the Control Panel. On System Variable screen, click Ok to close the window. You may have to reboot the computer for these changes to take affect. I.

See Section 1.8 for configuring MBS for network applications. Congratulations! You have successfully installed MBS using the Automated Install. See Section 1.5 for hardware lock installation in detail.

1.4.2

Manual Method This installation process, unlike the Automated method, is not as easy. Just follow the steps below to manually configure and install MBS. These steps requires a computer that currently has MBS.


16


A. After turning the computer on and getting into Windows, open Windows Explorer. Copy the MBS files from a computer that already has MBS running on it to the destination computer. This may take some time, depending on speed of your network and/or method of copying files. If files are copied using a CD backup copy, then the file attributes of all files copied must be changed to Read-Write instead of Read-Only. B. The Comprehensive Reports program (CompRep.zip) can be downloaded from the MBS FTP site and is located in the MBS\Reports sub-folder. You need to download this file into a temporary directory and unzip and run the SETUP.EXE. See Section 1.4.1.B for installation. C. The Translation Editor install program (TDFSetup.exe) can be downloaded from the MBS FTP site and is located in the MBS\Installs sub-folder. See section 1.4.1.C for installation. D. The Visual Parameter Editor program (VPESetup.exe) can be downloaded from the MBS FTP site and is located in the MBS\Installs sub-folder. See section 1.4.1.D for installation. E. With that step completed, we will install the MiniView software. The self-install executable (MiniViewMBS.exe) can be downloaded from the MBS FTP site and is located in the MBS\MiniView sub-folder. After downloading, double click on the exe file and follow the steps in Section 1.4.1.E starting at item b. The DXFView.exe program has replaced Miniview for Windows software as the default DXF viewer. The user can specify an alternate by editing the DXF VIEW section definition for the options in the MBS.INI (or equivalent) file. F. Once that step is complete, we can now install the Az-Tech hardware lock software. On the MBS FTP site, in the MBS\AzTech sub-folder, are two folders: ver222 and ver231. The ver231 is also for USB hardware locks and we suggest if you install 2.31 version on one computer, you should install it on all the computers in the office. Version 2.22 (SETUP32. EXE) is dated 11/22/99 and Version 2.31 (SETUP_AZ_DRIVERS.EXE) is dated 5/21/02. As of the Windows 7 operating system, you should use the AzRockey.exe (dated 11/15/09) for installation. After downloading, double click on the exe file and follow the steps in Section 1.4.1.G. Into the MBS\LIB folder, you must place the KECHK32.DLL (and KECHK2. DLL (16 bit) for 2.22). Make sure the files within the version are correct. You should never mix and match versions. Verify that KECHK32.DLL (version 2.31) or KECHK32.DLL and KECHK2.DLL (version 2.22) are contained in the C: \MBS\LIB directory. Into the MBS\EXE2 folder, you must place the RENEW.EXE, ERRCODE.EXE, and KESHOW.EXE. Use same precautions as you did in previous note. Version 2.31 is not only for USB locks but will work for parallel port locks but should be dated 2002 or newer. G. To complete the installing of MBS, follow steps 1.4.1.H for either modifying the Autoexec.bat file (for Windows 9x and ME) or modifying registry values (for Windows NT/2000/XP). © 2011 Metal Building Software, Inc


17

H. The MBS.INI may need to be modified if this computer will be setup for using files located in a central location or network. See Section 1.8 for configuration for network use and Appendix A7 for correct directory structure used. The list of directories below is the directories that must be on each computer that will allow MBS to run. The directories that are not shown can be located on a network computer. NOTE: Make sure to modify your MBS.INI (or equivalent) to reflect these directory substitutions. a. b. c. d. I.

EXEWIN1 LIB EXE2, and SYSTEM

You will need to copy the MLCD1.dll from a computer running MBS (located in either the \Windows or \WinNT directory) to your \Windows or WinNT directory. NOTE: This is no longer valid as of 19 December 2007 as Windows Vista or newer operating systems do not allow for Winhelp files. The help files are now CHM files and you will need a different control program to be able to access the new CHM help.

J. You must create the directory, C:\MBS_JOBS\ (or equivalent), for storing of job files. Be sure to make the changes in the MBS.INI file. See Section 1.8 for help with MBS.INI. Finished. You have successfully installed MBS using the Manual Install. See Section 1.5 for hardware lock installation.

1.5

To Install the Hardware Lock The MBS software will not process buildings unless the MBS hardware lock is installed on the parallel port or USB port. The hardware lock should be directly attached to the computer. All other peripherals should be attached to the back of the hardware lock (parallel port type only). In most cases, the hardware lock will not interfere with the printer operation. However, if a printer is attached, the printer must be turned on in order for the hardware lock to function properly. The hardware lock is dated. When the date is exceeded the MBS program will no longer operate. Refer to Appendix A2: LOCK UPDATE.

1.6

To Check or Advance the Date on the Hardware Lock The user can check the time remaining and advance the hardware lock while on any of the MBS Main screens. Press and the program will display the lock serial number, the number of days remaining on the hardware lock as well as the expiration date.


18


The program to advance the date on the hardware lock is activated by pressing or . The program will prompt for a renew code. Contact MBS to obtain the renew code. If Alt-F9 or Shift-F9, is not active, execute the file RENEW.EXE or RENEW32.EXE in the C: \MBS\EXE2 directory.

1.7

Setup the Jobs Directory The files for each new MBS job reside in a specific directory. This directory will have the same name as the job. Typically, one main directory is used to store all the individual job directories. The program defaults the name of that directory as C:\MBS_JOBS. You can change the name of the directory. Edit the line "DEFAULTJOB=" in the C:\MBS\SYSTEM\MBS.INI file.

1.8

MBS.INI File, C:\MBS\SYSTEM\MBS.INI This is a window INI file and configures MBS. This type of file is used when Windows programs are being initialized. Each Windows program is setup with a pre-defined format for the INI file. The MBS.INI file requires a thorough understanding of each command line. Note: MBS is automatically installed to run without editing the MBS.INI file. The user needs only edit the MBS.INI file to specifically customize the software for unique use. The MBS.INI file follows a set format herein described. SPECIAL LINES: '|'= COMMENT LINE(S), will begin with a special character, the pipe symbol. This special character is located on your keyboard <\>. Any comment needed for future clarification by the user can be added anywhere in the file by starting the line with the pipe symbol character, |. [ ] = SECTIONS. There are predefined Sections that tell the program that the following lines pertain to the section. The current MBS.INI Sections are: [PATHS] [STARTUP] [MBS_OLD] [MBS_INIT] [JOBPATHS] [JOBLIST] [LOCK] [CELLS] [PROCESSING] [DESCTRL EDIT] [DEALER] [OPTIONS] [FORMAT] [TRANSLATION] [TEXT EDIT] [DXF EDIT] [DXF VIEW] © 2011 Metal Building Software, Inc


19

[PKZIP COPY] [PKZIP PACK] [PKZIP FLOPPY] [PKUNZIP] [TEXT PRINT] [DXF PRINT] [WINDOWS] [MAKE DDD] [MAKE ALL] [ZIPPATHS] [TDF_EDIT] [LANGUAGE] [DESUSER] Below is a description of each Section. Each Section entry is followed by example entries and a description for each entry. [PATHS]

Indicates the directory names to search for various MBS files. Below this line are MBS standard directory names, followed by the = symbol, followed by the PATH to look for files. Below are examples of the default PATH locations, which are on the C:\ drive. Other drives or directories can contain the default PATH, including network drives (F:\, or G:\, etc).

= Default location for *.BLK files. = Default location for X*.EXE files. The X*.EXE files can be located in any sub-directory under the C:\MBS directory. CODE=C:\MBS\CODE\ = Default location for the building code files. The each code file, i.e. IBC.06, ASCE.05, etc, contained in this folder, store the default settings as set by MBS but can be modified by the user. DEFAULTJOB=C:\MBS_JOBS\ = Default location for the JobPath. This is used by the Job Manager Program. When This line does not exist or references a directory name that does not exist, then the program will default to the directory from where the program was launched. The program launched was MBS2.EXE in the C:\MBS\EXEWIN1 directory. DOC2=C:\MBS\DOC2\ = Default location for DESCTRL.*, DWGCTRL.*, and MBS.* files. The default file extension for these files is *. IN, however other extensions are used when other defaults for these files are made. Other files with *.DEF extension are also located by this PATH. DXF=C:\MBS\DXF\ = Default location for *.DXF files. The MBS-WIN help programs require the *.DXF files to be located here for Hyper-Link, which allows viewing of a DXF file while in the help. EXE2=C:\MBS\EXE2\ = Default location for *.EXE files. The *.EXE files can be located in any sub-directory under the C:\MBS directory. ERRORS=CURRENTJOB = Default location for error trapping files to be written to and read from. This can be either a directory, or the special BLK=C:\MBS\BLK\ CHECK=C:\MBS\EXETEST\


20


HLP=C:\MBS\HLP\ HLPWIN=C:\MBS\HLPWIN1\

LIB=C:\MBS\LIB\

NOT=C:\MBS\NOT\ REP=C:\MBS\REP\

SIZ2=C:\MBS\SIZ2\ TRANS=C:\MBS\TRANS\

[STARTUP]

case of CURRENTJOB. The typical directories used for this is either the C:\MBS\ERRORS\ directory or the current job directory. This feature is added to remove conflicts with running multiple copies of MBS running at the same time. When a default location other than the current directory is used, then multiple copies of MBS may not be able to run at the same time without conflict as each copy of MBS that is running will be accessing the same files and can cause conflicts. The indication that a conflict occurs is an error message of: ERROR I/O 32. = Default location for MBS-Dos help files. = Default location for MBS-Win help files, which are Windows type help files that include hyper-text jumps to other portions of help and jumps to reference drawings. = Default location for *.DLL files. These are Data Link Library files, which work in conjunction with Windows executable programs (MBS2.EXE). = Default location for note files, most commonly *.NOT files. = Default location for *.FRM files. Template FoRMat files are used for CONTRACTs, SHIP lists, CADD script files, NOTEs for drawings, PROPOSALs, and DXFCOVER sheets. = Default locations for DATA FILEs. The standard extension for data files is *.SIZ = Default location for *.TDF files. These are for translation of text for erection drawings and drawing option files.

This feature allows for command lines to be run before the program begins. Command lines are items that can be typed in and run at the command prompt. TYPICAL USES INCLUDE: The most common use of [STARTUP] is to update the C:\MBS directories from the network at the start of MBS. Then all the computers in-house could obtain the data files from their C:\ drive and the network could be the back-up copy of the program. Users could run the program even when the network is down, or they are not logged onto the network. Updating from the network can be performed using the MBSUPDAT.EXE program located in the C:\MBS\UTIL directory. This program will prompt the user to update newer files. |Performs the command lines shown before the Get Job screen appears. CMD1=C:\MBS\UTIL\MBSUPDAT.EXE m:\exe2\*.exe c:\mbs\exe2 CMD2=C:\MBS\UTIL\MBSUPDAT.EXE m:\siz2\*.* c:\mbs\siz2 CMD3=C:\MBS\UTIL\MBSUPDAT.EXE m:\rep\*.* c:\mbs\rep CMD4=C:\MBS\UTIL\MBSUPDAT.EXE m:\dxf\*.dxf c:\mbs\dxf

NOTE: Some users may want to use system calls, such as COPY, DELETE, or RENAME. System calls are where an operation is performed, but there is not an EXE file included in the PATH. For these scenarios, you will need to start a command window and then use the /C command switch to do the system call. This is typically required © 2011 Metal Building Software, Inc


21

for Windows NT, Windows 2000, and Windows XP. The following line is an example line for using this switch: CMD5=CMD /C"COPY M:\MBS\SIZ2\*.SIZ C:\MBS\SIZ2"

NOTE: Source and destination location MUST be a mapped drive, i.e. C:, M:, X:. You cannot use \\Computer\Directory. [MBS_OLD]

This feature allows for command lines to be run when an existing job is opened. Command lines are items that can be typed in and run at the command prompt. TYPICAL USES INCLUDE: The most common use of [MBS_OLD] is to update this job with the latest data files when an old job is opened. Updating from the default \MBS\SIZ2 location can be performed using the MBSUPDAT.EXE program located in the \MBS\UTIL directory. This program will prompt the user to update newer files.

[MBS_INIT]

This feature allows for command lines to be run when a new job is created. Command lines are items that can be typed in and run at the command prompt. TYPICAL USES INCLUDE: The most common use of [MBS_INIT] is to open a log file that is begun when the job has been initialized. The log file is accessed each time the job has been opened and logs the user and current time that the job was accessed.

[JOBPATHS]

This feature allows for common directories to be listed in the "Jobs Directory:" pull down list. This pull down list is available after the "Get Job" button has been selected. This allows for quicker access to different common directories that jobs are stored in. Some directories could be on the local hard drive and others on a network drive. An entry is designated as: PATHx=C:\MBS_JOBS\

[JOBLIST]

where for each line x is a unique integer value such as 0, 1, 2, etc.

This feature allows the program to automatically open the last job and to select from a list the last opened MBS Jobs in the job manager. One additional entry is required under this section heading. MaxJobs=#

the maximum number of previously opened jobs that is to be viewed in the list. The program limit is 20 jobs.

One optional entry can be included under this section heading. AUTOLOAD=ON


The program will automatically load the last job opened. The job Id dialog box and the job manager is not displayed with this option.

22


[LOCK]

This has miscellaneous features that affect the lock. There are currently three features available with this option: DELAY=xxxx, AVI=OFF, and EXPIRE_DATE=xx. DELAY=xxxx

delays the lock check by the number of milliseconds specified.

AVI=OFF

turns off the AVI that appears when the make, or make all is used. The AVI is a building being assembled while the system is busy.

EXPIRE_DATE=xx

allows the warning that appears when you are within the number of days specified. For example, when 7 is entered you will be warned 7 days prior to the lock expiring about the number of days left on the lock.

[CELLS]

This is an Advanced feature. Specify the cell name locations that are to be turned off, or left blank, by the control program. Format is CELL NAME followed by an = sign. When a cell name has an INPUT and OUTPUT location and is listed in this SECTION, both locations will be blank. TYPICAL USES INCLUDE: Pricing information may not be viewable by engineers. The engineers could have the pricing information, DETAIL screen and DATABASE screen, cells left blank by this Section setting. The engineering department may want more than locked file protection against accidental re MAKE ALL by someone else. The other than engineers could have the DESIGN screen cells left blank by this Section setting. You may not require the "to scale" extra plate drawings now default, made in the SHOP DRAWING screen. These are for Nesting software which optimizes for least waste. Rather than have the program generate these extra DXF files, simply have those cell locations left blank. Example line entries for this Section are shown below:

RF_WEB= RF_BEP= RF_FLG= RF_STF= CWI_WEB= CWI_BEP= CWI_FLG= CWI_STF=

= = = = = = = =

cell cell cell cell cell cell cell cell

location location location location location location location location

left left left left left left left left

blank blank blank blank blank blank blank blank

on on on on on on on on

the the the the the the the the

SHOP SHOP SHOP SHOP SHOP SHOP SHOP SHOP

DRAWINGS DRAWINGS DRAWINGS DRAWINGS DRAWINGS DRAWINGS DRAWINGS DRAWINGS

screen. screen. screen. screen. screen. screen. screen. screen.

Except from PE 10-02-4:



EditJobControlFile= MakeCostEstimate= ViewCostEstimate= PrintCostEstimate= MakeContract= ViewContract= PrintContract= BuildingDrawings= ZipJob=

= = = = = = = = =

button button button button button button button button button

turned turned turned turned turned turned turned turned turned

off off off off off off off off off

on on on on on on on on on

Dealer Dealer Dealer Dealer Dealer Dealer Dealer Dealer Dealer

main main main main main main main main main

23

screen screen screen screen screen screen screen screen screen

[PROCESSING] This is an Advanced feature. Format is the cell name in MBS followed by the program or bat file name to be run immediately after the MBS cell. The separate program will be run and MBS will resume when the program is closed. Using the MAKE ALL or MAKE TAGGED options will continue when the PROCESSING of the current cell is complete. NOTE: *.bat and *.com files must have the extension included in the command line to be processed. Windows programs will accept only *.EXE as the default extension for command lines. Example 1 You may want to rename the SHIP.OUT file to SHIP.XLS and the EXCEL program to load this file to be processed immediately upon completion of making the SHIP cell. This can be done by a batch file with 2 lines. The batch file, SHIP_XLS.BAT, would contain the following 2 lines and be located in the C:\MBS\EXE2 directory: COPY SHIP.OUT SHIP.XLS C:\PROGRAM FILES\MICROSOFT OFFICE\OFFICE\EXCEL SHIP.XLS

The line in the MBS.INI file's [PROCESSING] section would be: SHIP=C:\MBS\EXE2\SHIP_XLS.BAT

Example 2 You may want to load SHIP.OUT into Notepad immediately upon completion of making the SHIP cell. This requires one line in the MBS.INI file: SHIP=NOTEPAD %1

Example 3 You may want to generate user input error messages, assign user variables, or change data file settings. The program DESUSER will perform all of these features. The line in the MBS.INI file's [PROCESSING] section would be: MBSDESED=C:\MBS\UTIL\DESUSER

This line would execute after closing the Building Input Editor (MBSDESED). If this process is required upon closing the job information then use the following command: MBSINFO=C:\MBS\UTIL\DESUSER © 2011 Metal Building Software, Inc

24


[DESCTRL EDIT]

These are features used to define the DOS version or WINDOWS version of the input screens.

Option1 = WINDOWS is used to specify the Windows Design Editor to be used. Without the Option1 = WINDOWS line specified, the program will default to the DOS version of the input screens. The second line allows the user to setup more than one DESED.INI file, which can be used for an In-House versus Dealer version of the input screens. The default choice of DESED.INI file is shown. When this line is not present the DESED.INI file is used for the input format. The INI file specified must be located in the \MBS\SYSTEM directory. Setting up the DESED.INI options are explained in PE 10-99-4. Option1=WINDOWS INI=DesEd.ini

[DEALER]

This section allows for preference settings on the Dealer program. STATUS=ON is used to display the program which is making within the MBS.avi. If a problem occurs while making a dealer job, this feature can be activated to determine the program that ran last prior to the problem occurring. DESWARN=HIDE is used to hide the design warnings output. This output is automatically displayed after the Cost Summary is viewed.

[OPTIONS]

The features available allow for setting preferences while entering or leaving a job. When entering a new or existing job, the program allows for command lines to effect specific functions when starting the program. Command lines are items that can be typed in and run at the command prompt. The command lines allow the user to display or not display the Job Information Screen. When exiting an open job, the program allows the open job to automatically zip, never zip or query, (i.e. zip or not to zip). Depending upon how jobs are handled on a daily basis these options can streamline the entry and exiting of a project.

|Enter only one command line for the following set. SHOWJOBINFO=FALSE Do not display the Job Information Screen SHOWJOBINFO=TRUE Display Job Information Screen (default) |Enter only one command line for the following set. AUTOZIP=ALWAYS Always zip job upon exiting AUTOZIP=NEVER Never zip job upon exiting AUTOZIP=QUERY Query Yes or No to zip upon exiting (default) SPECIAL=STANDALONE

Allows the special program to be open and not minimize the MBS control program. MBS database files can be accessed while using the special program. © 2011 Metal Building Software, Inc


25

SETTINGS=C:\MBS\SYSTEM\MBSSET.INI Allows the user to control the pop-up functions of each cell by specifying this information in the referenced file. (See 10-05-2)

[FORMAT]

This specifies the format to use when reporting certain items. Current items controlled by this section include: DATE.

DATE=MM/DD/YY Month is designated by the M characters and can be either MM for a numeric value, or MMM for the first three characters of the month. Year is designated by the Y characters and can be either YY for last two digit numeric values of the year, or YYYY for the four digit numeric value of the year. Only one character is permitted as the separator between month, day, and year. The month, day, and year can be in any order. [TRANSLATION] This is an Advanced feature. Format is the EXE file in MBS followed by the translation file name to be used to translate terms used by the TRANSLAT.EXE program. Refer to PE 7-95-4 or Detailing Manual 8.3.1 for the purpose of the TRANSLAT.EXE program. This was previously available only for Report file types. The use has been extended to Design and Detail output files, which allows these files to be converted to Spanish, Chinese, or any other language. This is only necessary when the *.TDF file name is different from the cell name. RFDES=RFDES.TDF [TEXT EDIT]

This specifies the text editor to be used when a text file is edited. There are 3 text editor options available. These are command lines run when the proper keys are pressed. OPTION1 occurs when the or or right mouse click and is selected. The first option is to the MBS-Win text editor, which has the HELP and GRAPHICS features available. OPTION2 occurs when the keyboard or is pressed or right mouse click and is selected. The second option is user specified to any editor, but the HELP and GRAPHICS features are not available. The editor PATH and executable file name followed by %1 for the cell name are used. For example, to use NOTEPAD as this editor, use the following line: Option2=C:\WINDOWS\NOTEPAD %1

OPTION3 occurs when the keyboard or is pressed or Right mouse click and is selected. The third option is user specified to any editor, but the HELP and GRAPHICS features are not available. The editor PATH and executable file name followed by %1 for the cell name are used. For example, to use DOS EDIT as this editor, use the following line: Option3=C:\WINDOWS\Command\Edit.com %1


26


Other text editors can be used for OPTION2 and OPTION3. These are just 2 examples that may be used. For all editors the file must be saved in ASCII format. [DXF EDIT]

This specifies the DXF editor to be used when a DXF file is edited. These options will normally contain 2 command lines. The first line generates a script file to be used once the CADD package is started. The second command line loads the CADD package and the script file. There are 3 DXF editor options available. These are command lines run when the proper keys are pressed. OPTION1 occurs when the or or Right mouse click and is selected. This makes the script file for CADD. OPTION1a follows and loads the CADD and the script file using one command line. OPTION2 occurs when the keyboard or is pressed or Right mouse click and is selected. This makes the script file for CADD. OPTION2a follows and loads the CADD and the script file using one command line. OPTION3 occurs when the keyboard or is pressed or Right mouse click and is selected. This makes the script file for CADD. OPTION3a follows and loads the CADD and the script file using one command line. RunMode#=there are four available settings for this line: HIDE, SHOW, MIN, or MAX. HIDE is used to run a command line or DOS program behind the scenes, that is, a separate screen does not appear and the program icon will not appear in the Windows Task bar at the bottom of the Desktop. This mode should not be used for any Windows programs, such as WordPad or Notepad, because this will lock up the computer. This is used for the script file command line, but not for the starting of the CADD package. Do not use for WinNT/2000/XP applications. SHOW is used to run a command line or program in the standard window size. A program icon will appear in the Windows Task bar at the bottom of the Desktop. This mode allows the program to return focus to the MBS program. The launched program does not need to be closed to run MBS. MIN is used to run a Windows program in the minimized mode. For this mode, the program will launch without a screen appearing. The only indication that the program is running is that a program icon will appear in the Windows Task bar at the bottom of the Desktop. MAX is used to run a command line or program in the maximized mode, or full screen. A program icon will appear in the Windows Task bar at the bottom of the Desktop. The most common CADD package is AutoCAD; therefore, our example command © 2011 Metal Building Software, Inc


27

lines are for various versions of AutoCAD. Command lines for other CADD packages can be used which load the CADD package and a script file. Consult the CADD manual for steps to take. Option#=c:\mbs\exe2\dxfedit %1 dxfedit#.frm caddedit.scr *Typical AutoCAD, any version, first command line for creating script file*

# - represents the numbers 1, 2, or 3 mentioned above. c:\mbs\exe2\dxfedit - a program that takes a parameter, %1, and using the template file substitutes in the value of the variable into a separate file placed in the current job directory. %1 - first parameter for the dxfedit program. Name of the cell currently on in MBS when program is run. dxfedit#.frm - second parameter for the dxfedit program. Name of template file used for substitution. caddedit.scr - name of script file made in the current directory with values for variables substituted. RunMode#=HIDE *Typical AutoCAD, any version, first RunMode line for creating script file* Option#a=start c:\acltwin\aclt %1 caddedit.scr *Typical AutoCAD LT second command line.*

# - represents the numbers 1, 2, or 3 mentioned above. start - Win95 and Win98 method of starting a new program. NOTE: Do NOT use start OR RunMode#=HIDE with WinNT/2000/XP! c:\acltwin\aclt - the Autocad program executable file including the complete PATH to the file. It takes the parameter, %1, as the drawing name and runs the script file name that follows. %1 - first parameter for the AutoCAD program, used as the drawing name. caddedit.scr - name of script file to be run. This script file is located in the current directory. Option#a=start c:\progra~1\autoca~1\aclt /b caddedit.scr Option#a=start "c:\program files\autocad LT97\aclt" /b caddedit.scr *Typical AutoCAD LT 97 second command line. The above 2 lines are identical.*

start - Win95 and Win98 method of starting a new program. NOTE: Do NOT use start OR RunMode#=HIDE with WinNT/2000/XP! c:\progra~1\autoca~1\aclt - the Autocad program executable file including the complete PATH to the file. It takes the parameter, %1, as the drawing name and runs the script file name that follows. (~1 - Win95 and Win98 representation of long file names) /b - switch for AutoCAD to know that what follows is a script file name to be run. © 2011 Metal Building Software, Inc

28


"caddedit.scr" - name of script file to be run. This script file is located in the current directory. RunMode#=HIDE *Typical GeneriCADD first RunMode line for creating macro file* Option#=c:\mbs\exe2\dxfedit %1 dxfedit#.frm *Typical GeneriCADD first command line*

caddedit.mcr

# - represents the numbers 1, 2, or 3 mentioned above. c:\mbs\exe2\dxfedit - a program that takes a parameter, %1, and using the template file substitutes in the value of the variable into a separate file placed in the current job directory. %1 - first parameter for the dxfedit program. Name of the cell currently on in MBS when program is run. dxfedit#.frm - second parameter for the dxfedit program. Name of template file used for substitution. caddedit.mcr - name of macro file made in the current directory with values for variables substituted. This is similar to the AutoCAD script file. Option#a=copy caddedit.mcr c:\cadd6\caddedit.mcr

command line that copies caddedit.mcr from the current job directory to the default location set for GeneriCADD. Option#b=start c:\cadd6\cadd %1 caddedit.mcr

start - Win95 and Win98 method of starting a new program. NOTE: Do NOT use start OR RunMode#=HIDE with WinNT/2000/XP! c:\cadd6\cadd - the GeneriCADD program executable file including the complete PATH to the file. It takes the parameter, %1, as the drawing name and runs the macro file name that follows. %1 - first parameter for the GeneriCADD program, used as the drawing name. caddedit.mcr - name of macro file to be run. This macro file is located in the default location set for GeneriCADD. [DXF VIEW]

This specifies the DXF viewer to be used when a DXF file is viewed. These options will normally contain one command line, which loads the DXF viewer program and opens the DXF file. There are 3 DXF viewer options available. These are command lines run when the proper keys are pressed. The MBS program comes with other DXF viewers. OPTION1 occurs when the or or Right mouse click and is selected. OPTION2 occurs when the keyboard or are pressed or Right mouse click and is selected.



29

OPTION3 occurs when the keyboard or is pressed or Right mouse click and is selected. Option1= *Windows Miniview is the default viewer (C:\MBS\MINIVIEW\MVW.EXE)* Option#=start c:\mbs\miniview\asmn %1 *DOS Miniview command line* Option#=start c:\mbs\exe2\fdxf %1 *FastDXF viewer command line*

[PKZIP COPY]

command line entry used in the Job Manager program when the COPY JOB option is selected.

Option1=C:\MBS\EXE2\MBSZIP -a -Jr -x*.zip %1 *.*

c:\mbs\exe2\mbszip - the mbszip program executable file name including the complete PATH to the file. The MBSzip command is followed by switches, which tell the program how to execute. All switches start with the - symbol. After the switches is the file name to create followed by which files to zip. Switches are best described by typing in MBSZIP at the command prompt and follow the instructions for viewing switch settings. -a

a switch to add files

-Jr

a switch to mask the read-only files, include these

-x*.zip do not include any files with extension *.zip %1

name of zip file is passed as a variable that has the same name as current directory

*.*

include all files not excluded with the -x switch

RunMode1=HIDE *Typical MBSZIP and MBSUNZIP RunMode line*

[PKZIP PACK]

command line entry used in the Job Manager program when the PACK JOB option is selected.

Option1=C:\MBS\EXE2\MBSZIP -m -a -Jr -x*.zip %1 *.*

-m

a switch to move files. The unzipped file is removed from the current directory when the zip is started.

NOTE: This option can result in loss of files should your hard drive be full. [PKZIP FLOPPY] command line entry used in the MBS Windows program when the keyboard is pressed or with the mouse , option is selected. © 2011 Metal Building Software, Inc

30


Option1=C:\MBS\EXE2\MBSZIP -a -Jr -x*.zip %1 *.*

[PKUNZIP]

command line entry used in the Job Manager program when a job is selected and a *.zip file with the same name as the directory exists.

Option1=C:\MBS\EXE2\MBSUNZIP -n -Jr %1

c:\mbs\exe2\mbsunzip - the mbsunzip program executable file name including the complete PATH to the file. The mbsunzip command is followed by switches, which tell the program how to execute. All switches start with the - symbol. After the switches is the file name to unzip. Switches are best described by typing in MBSUNZIP at the command prompt and follow the instructions for viewing switch settings.

[TEXT PRINT]

-n

a switch to extract from the zip file only newer files than are in the current directory

-Jr

a switch to mask the read-only files, include these

%1

name of zip file is passed as a variable that has the same name as current directory

Printer settings for text files. These values are updated to this file when with the mouse , , changes made, and SAVE AS DEFAULT are selected.

NOTE: These should not be changed with a text editor. Only from within the MBS program, as described above, should these lines be changed. [DXF PRINT]

Printer settings for DXF files. These values are updated to this file when with the mouse , , changes made, and SAVE AS DEFAULT are selected.

NOTE: These should not be changed with a text editor. Only from within the MBS program, as described above, should these lines be changed. [WINDOWS]

Position for the upper left hand corner of the MBS-WIN screen when placed on the DESKTOP.

NOTE: The upper left hand corner of the DESKTOP is the zero x-position and zero yposition. Down and to the right are positive directions. [MAKE DDD]

This feature allows the user to include through Drawing2, or Combined Dwg tabs when the Make Des/Dt/Dwg is selected from the Auto button. The line following the section heading defines which option the user prefers. The line begins with the word Option, and is followed by the equal sign and an integer for the number of building drawing screens to include.



31

Option=1 includes only Drawing1 Option=2 includes Drawing1 and Drawing2 Option=3 includes Drawing1, Drawing2, and Combined Dwg [MAKE ALL]

This feature allows the user to exclude cells from the Make All process without totally removing the cell name. The lines following the section are the cell name followed by an equal sign. The cell will still be present allowing the user to double click the cell to make. This can be used for items that do not change, such as DwgCovers, or for cells that do not apply to your company, such as to-scale drawings for a plasma cutting machine.

[ZIPPATHS]

This feature allows the user to define different locations to be used for the ZIP JOB TO utility. See PE 6-03-2.

The ZIP JOB TO directory pull-down is populated by the lines you enter, where the first entry is the default. To properly format each entry, the user is to precede the folder location with an integer Id and equal sign. i.e.

[TDF_EDIT]

0=C:\SAMPLES\CANOPY 1=C:\SAMPLES\FACIA 2=C:\SAMPLES\PARAPET

This feature disables the accessing of the TDF (translation) editor. |Translation and Options Editor MENU=OFF Removes the ability to access translation editor

[LANGUAGE]

This feature allows the user to define different language files to be used for the translation of different program sections. These sections and a description is shown below. See PE 3-05-6 for further setup. See PE 3-05-5 for preparing the translation file. DRAWINGS=CHINESE-B

Used to define the language file used for translating the elevation and shop drawings. EDITOR=CHINESE-B

Used to define the language file used for translating the Building Input Editor. INPUT/OUTPUT=CHINESE-B

Used to define the language file used for translating the Input and Output files. SYSTEM=CHINESE-B

Used to define the language file used for translating the MBS system programs. [DESUSER]

This feature allows the user to specify the INI file and its file path to be used for: DESERROR= Name of INI file for user defined errors DESUSER= Name of INI file for user defined variables DB_USER= Name of INI file for parameter adjustments [DESUSER] DESERROR=C:\MBS\SYSTEM\DESERROR.dif DESUSER=C:\MBS\SYSTEM\DESUSER.dif


32


DB_USER=C:\MBS\SYSTEM\DB_USER.dif

Some lines and [SECTIONS] in the original MBS.INI file have become obsolete. These are listed below by Section. In the [PATHS] Section: SECTIONTYPE=PATHSELECT In the [TEXT EDIT] and [DXF VIEW] Section: SECTIONTYPE=COMMANDLINE1R In the [MBS SECTIONS] and [PRINTER SETUP] Sections: *Eliminate all lines and the Section* In the [DXF EDIT], [PKZIP COPY], [PKZIP PACK], [PKZIP FLOPPY], and [PKUNZIP] Sections: SECTIONTYPE=COMMANDLINE In the [TEXT PRINT] Section: SECTIONTYPE=COMMANDLINEPRINT1R In the [DXF PRINT] Section: SECTIONTYPE=COMMANDLINEPRINT



Below is an example MBS.INI file for reference: |-----------------------------------------------------------------| C:\MBS\SYSTEM\MBS.INI | | The following sections may be edited:[PATHS], [TEXT EDIT], | [DXF EDIT] and [DXF VIEW] [PATHS] | Indicates the directories to be used to store various MBS files. EXE2=C:\MBS\EXE2\ CHECK=C:\MBS\EXE2\ MAIN=C:\MBS\EXEWIN1\ DOC2=C:\MBS\DOC2\ BLK=C:\MBS\BLK\ DXF=C:\MBS\DXF\ HLP=C:\MBS\HLP\ HLPWIN=C:\MBS\HLPWIN1\ SIZ2=C:\MBS\SIZ2\ NOT=C:\MBS\NOT\ REP=M:\REP\ TRANS=C:\MBS\TRANS\ LIB=C:\MBS\LIB\ DEF=C:\MBS\DOC2\ CODE=C:\MBS\CODE\ DEFAULTJOB=D:\ ERRORS=c:\MBS\ERRORS\ [STARTUP] |CMD1=C:\MBS\UTIL\MBSUPDAT.EXE m:\exe2\*.exe c:\mbs\exe2 |CMD2=C:\MBS\UTIL\MBSUPDAT.EXE m:\dxf\*.dxf c:\mbs\dxf [JOBPATHS] PATH0=C:\MBS_JOBS\ALT_JOBS\ PATH1=C:\BALONGNA\ PATH2=C:\MBS_JOBS\ PATH3=C:\JOBS\ PATH4=C:\QUOTES\ [MBS_OLD] [MBS_INIT] [DESCTRL EDIT] Option1=WINDOWS INI=DESED.INI [LOCK] |Options available for lock. |DELAY will stall the lock check by number of milliseconds specified. | (500 ms=1/2 second) |AVI will turn off the building AVI displayed when system is busy. | |DELAY=500 AVI=OFF © 2011 Metal Building Software, Inc

33

34


[CELLS] |List cells, which should not be displayed, followed by an equal sign (=) |CWI_WEB= |CWI_FLG= |CWI_STF= |CWI_BEP= |Asm_Dwg= |Desctrl= |EwDet= |DwgCover= |WallIns= [OPTIONS] |Enter only one command line for the following set. | SHOWJOBINFO=FALSE Do not display the Job Information Screen | SHOWJOBINFO=TRUE Display Job Information Screen (default) |Enter only one command line for the following set. | AUTOZIP=ALWAYS Always zip job upon exiting | AUTOZIP=NEVER Never zip job upon exiting | AUTOZIP=QUERY Query 'Yes' or 'No' to zip upon exiting (default) |Translation and Options Editor | TDF_EDIT=OFF Removes the ability to access translation editor SHOWJOBINFO=FALSE AUTOZIP=ALWAYS [TEXT EDIT] | Command line entries used to invoke TEXT editors. Option1= Option2=C:\WINDOWS\Command\Edit.com %1 Option3="C:\program files\microsoft office\office\WinWord" %1 [PROCESSING] | Indicates which executable file or batch file will be run upon | the MBS program completing | | FORMAT: Executable=BATch File Name MBSDESED=C:\MBS\UTIL\DESUSER.EXE SHIP=NOTEPAD %1 [TRANSLATION] RFDES=RFDES.TDF [DXF EDIT] | Command line entries used to invoke DXF editors. | Note: Runmode should not be used with Win2000 or WinNT | Note: Any invalid DOS path names must be in quotes | | First option: example of AutoCAD LT 98 running on Win98 Option1=c:\mbs\exe2\dxfedit %1 dxfedit1.frm caddedit.scr Option1a=start "c:\program files\autocad lt 98\aclt" /b caddedit.scr RunMode1=HIDE | Second option: example of AutoCAD LT 98 running on Win2000



Option2=c:\mbs\exe2\dxfedit %1 dxfedit1.frm caddedit.scr Option2a="c:\program files\autocad lt 98\aclt" /b caddedit.scr | Third option: example of AutoCAD LT R2 running on Win95 Option3=c:\mbs\exe2\dxfedit %1 dxfedit3.frm caddedit.scr Option3a=start c:\acltwin\aclt %1 caddedit.scr RunMode3=HIDE [DXF VIEW] | Command line entries used to invoke DXF viewers. Option1= Option2=C:\MBS\MINIVIEW\MVW %1 Option3=C:\MBS\EXE2\FDXF %1 [PKZIP COPY] Option1=C:\MBS\EXE2\PKZIP -a -Jr -x*.zip %1 *.* RunMode1=HIDE [PKZIP PACK] Option1=C:\MBS\EXE2\PKZIP -m -a -Jr -x*.zip %1 *.* RunMode1=HIDE [PKZIP FLOPPY] Option1=C:\MBS\EXE2\PKZIP -a -Jr -x*.zip %1 *.* RunMode1=HIDE [PKUNZIP] Option1=C:\MBS\EXE2\PKUNZIP -n -Jr %1 RunMode1=HIDE [MAKE DDD] |The Option is followed by the equal sign and |the number of building drawing screens |to include in the "Make Des/Dt/Dwg" | |Option=1 includes only BldgDwgs1 |Option=2 includes BldgDwgs1 and BldgDwgs2 |Option=3 includes BldgDwgs1, BldgDwgs2, and BldgDwgs3 Option=1 [MAKE ALL] DesCtrl= DwgCtrl= DwgCover= [ZIPPATHS] 0=C:\SAMPLES\CANOPY 1=C:\SAMPLES\FACIA 2=C:\SAMPLES\PARAPET [DESUSER] DESERROR=C:\MBS\SYSTEM\DESERROR.dif DESUSER=C:\MBS\SYSTEM\DESUSER.dif DB_USER=C:\MBS\SYSTEM\DB_USER.dif © 2011 Metal Building Software, Inc

35

36


[LANGUAGE] DRAWINGS=CHINESE-B EDITOR=CHINESE-B INPUT/OUTPUT=CHINESE-B SYSTEM=CHINESE-B | We recommend that sections below this point Should NOT be edited! [TEXT PRINT] Option1= Printer1=FinePrint Driver on FPR1: Orient1=Landscape UseTitle1=0 TitleFont1=Times New Roman TitleFontSize1=8 TitleFontStyle1=Bold BodyFont1=Courier New BodyFontSize1=12 BodyFontStyle1= Option2= Printer2=HP LaserJet 4L on LPT1: Orient2=Landscape UseTitle2=7 TitleFont2=Courier New TitleFontSize2=8 TitleFontStyle2=Bold Underline BodyFont2=Courier New BodyFontSize2=7 BodyFontStyle2= Option3= Printer3=HP LaserJet 4L on LPT1: Orient3=Portrait UseTitle3=7 TitleFont3=Courier New TitleFontSize3=11 TitleFontStyle3=Italic BodyFont3=Courier New BodyFontSize3=8 BodyFontStyle3= [DXF PRINT] Option1= Printer1=HP LaserJet 4L on LPT1: Orient1=Landscape Option2= Printer2=HP LaserJet 4L on LPT1: Orient2=Portrait Option3= Printer3=HP LaserJet 4L on LPT1: Orient3=Landscape PageWidth1=0 PageWidth2=0



PageWidth3=0 PageHeight1=0 PageHeight2=0 PageHeight3=0 [WINDOWS] PositionX=152 PositionY=85 [JOBLIST] NPrevJobs=1 MaxJobs=10 PREVJOB0=C:\MBS_JOBS\HELP_JOB

1.9

Directory Structure See Appendix A6 for a detailed description.


37

Part

II

Overview of MBS Software Operations

2


2.1

Introduction

39

MBS will do the complete processing of a steel framed building for: design, detailing, erection drawings, cost, shop drawings and preparing data for automatic shop processing. The purpose in this section is to provide an overview of those operations. Details of these operations will be described in other sections of the Manual, the purpose here is to provide an overview of the operations.

2.2

Starting MBS Start your computer. On the desktop, double click on the MBS icon, select GET JOB, select the desired Jobs Directory, and select the job from Job Manager by double clicking on the selected job, revise or click on the OK for the Job Information screen, then, the design screen appears as shown below.

2.3

Features on the MBS Screens Note the top line on the screen gives the job name, the INI file controlling MBS, and the Windows operating system for your computer. The next line of buttons is the toolbar. The bottom line on the screen gives further information on the job. These three lines of data are present on all MBS operation screens.

2.4

The ToolBar The tool bar contains buttons that control the MBS operations. The buttons are displayed below and described hereafter.


40

2.4.1


Control Options to get another job, browse jobs, select a recent job to open, zip current job to a different location, or exit MBS.

2.4.2

Utilities Special programs or files available to the MBS user, as shown below.

The File Maintenance provides an option to view the list of available files used in building startup for: drawing control, database files, and list of clients. These are *.DEF files described in Section 3.2 and Appendix 4.

Batch Print contains a list of drawings and input or output files that may be tagged and batch printed. Printer Setup is a program that leads you through setting up your windows printers to work with MBS. Job Info displays information for the current job such as customer name and address, designer, and drafter. The screen layout can be modified to suit the user's needs. *** An alternate method of accessing this screen is by pressing key in the Design, Detail, or Drawing screens. See Section A3 on hot keys. Program List is a list of special programs to process buildings. A sample program listing is shown on



41

next page. *** An alternate method of accessing this screen is by pressing key in the Design, Detail, or Drawing screens. See Section A3 on hot keys. Report Listing contains optional reports available to the program user. The reports can be variations in the shipping list and in the contract. The report listing looks similar to the program listing shown on next page. *** An alternate method of accessing this screen is by pressing key in the Design, Detail, or Drawing screens. See Section A3 on hot keys. Project Notes are used to denote progress, modifications, or revisions performed by the user. *** An alternate method of accessing this screen is by pressing key in the Design, Detail, or Drawing screens. See Section A3 on hot keys. Shipping List Editor program permits the user to revise the shipping list and have the revisions included in the cost report for the job. The detailing screen must be made prior to accessing the editor. Combine Materials List program allows the user to combine the shipping list from multiple jobs into the current job's shipping list. See PE 6-04-7 for setup and operation. Drawing Number is a utility program that permits the user to group and add page numbers into the logo of MBS generated drawings. See PE 12-01-12 for setup and operation. Dxf Cleanup is a utility program that permits the user to automatically or selective delete certain DXF files on a Make All.

Each line lists a different program. Each program is activated placing the cursor on the line and pressing the enter key or double clicking on line. With the first line, you can shell to DOS. The second © 2011 Metal Building Software, Inc

42


line is the program that makes multiple three dimensional drawings. Other programs include: customized reports, a detailed report on fastener count, program to update the DT_COST file with current inventory, programs to edit different job files, a program to combine shipping lists from other jobs, and a program to prepare fabrication data for the shop. A program listing entry can contain multiple commands, thus eliminating the need for a batch file.

2.4.3

Auto This button provides options for the automatic processing of all the cells on one or more screens.

2.4.4

Des/Det/Dwg This button represents the set of screens that are currently active below the tool bar. It is an abbreviation for design, detailing, and drawing.

2.4.5

Database This button represents the set of screens that contain the design and detailing files. When this button is pressed, the following screen appears.



43

The two tabs are for design files and for detailing files. The design files list the properties of the members available to the program to be used in building design. For example, the cell DS_CGIRT contains properties for the C girt members. Under the detail tab, the detailing files are listed. These files control the detailing of the building including detailing parameters, detailing methods, plus cost and inventory items.

2.4.6

Reference This tab brings up the reference drawings for the program. One of the reference drawing screens is shown below.


44


Note there are two lines of tabs for the reference drawings. The first four tabs on the top line are for erection details. The program automatically brings up these erection details and places the details on the detail sheets. The next two tabs on the top line are for detailing parameters. An example of a detailing parameter drawing, PA1, is shown on next page. This drawing illustrates the detailing parameters for the door jamb anchor bolts. The user sets the parameters ab, ad, ae, af, and ls. These parameters are stored in the DT_BUILD file. As the program locates the anchor bolts on the anchor bolt drawings and as it details the door jambs, it uses these parameters. The first tab, on the second line of tabs, is a continuation of detailing parameters. The next tab is for the standard shop drawings. They include shop drawings for connection plates, angles, and C section members used as columns or rafters. The final two tabs on the lower line are for detailing methods. Detailing method drawings illustrate the options for detailing connections between building components. An example of a detailing method drawing is the available methods of attaching a door jamb to a door header. See drawing DJ5 on page 7. Note that there are 7 available options for attaching a door jamb to a door header. The user selects the method they wish to use and enter that selection, such as option 1, for DM (detailing method) 12 in the DT_METHD.SIZ file. As door jambs and headers are detailed, the program follows this detailing method.




45

46

2.4.7


Help Press the help button and the following screen appears.



47

Click on any of these names or buttons to view that help reference. There are many hot keys and function keys available to the user. These keys are described in the first help reference. The MBS.INI file controls the setup and operation of MBS. The MBS options available to the user are described in this help file. Advice on setting the print options is given in the next help file. Section 1.4 of the Training Manual on setting up the MBS software is given in the next help file. The software user can make their unique drawing title blocks, which will automatically appear on their drawings. The process used to prepare the title blocks is given in the next help file. The four buttons on the bottom are jumps to additional help files. The program enhancement button is to all the current and former program enhancements. The help files are for 9 of the data files. The same files are available with the data file. It may be more convenient to use these help files since you do not have to get into the data base section of the software. The Example help is an electronic copy of the Example Manual. It does not include all the drawings that are in the paper copy of the Manual. The help file most important to understanding software setup is the connection help. This file describes the options available in selecting connections between members. As you press the Connections help button, the following screen appears.


48


Note the building is divided into seven areas, starting with the basic building and extending to special features like eave extensions and soldier columns. Click on the area where the connection details are to be investigated. For example, suppose you want to investigate the endwall column to wide flange rafter connection. Press the button next to Endwall Columns and the following screen appears.

Note that this screen is for "Connections To Endwall Columns". Note the left column lists the item to which the column is connected. In our case we want the W endwall rafter which is reported in the lower three lines of data. Note the next column of data is the column type. The fourth and fifth columns report the detailing method that controls the connection. The last column is a list of the © 2011 Metal Building Software, Inc


49

parameter drawings, which contain the parameters that are used in that connection. The person doing software setup will view drawing EC16 for the options in that connection and select the desired option for each column type. This option is set in the DT_METHD.SIZ file for each of listed detailing methods. Next, the associated detailing parameters are viewed; values selected, and set in the DT_BUILD.SIZ file.

2.5

Building Data Entry The first step in processing a building is to enter the desired building data in the program. To do this, move to the design screen (press the Des/Det/Dwg option on the tool bar), move the curser to the DesCtrl cell and press the E key. The building data entry screens will appear, follow section 3 on entering building data. Exit the building data entry screens and the program will return to the design screen.

2.6

Designing the Building Note the design screen consists of input files on the left and output files on the right. The cells are named Des meaning design and the remaining letters indicate the part of the building being designed at that cell. SW is sidewall, EW is endwall, Roof is roof framing including roof and sidewall bracing, Crane is crane beams, crane columns and auxiliary beams, RF is rigid frame, Comp is components like eave extension beams, and Part is partition walls. Note there are four cells on the output side that do not have input files; they include a framing summary, additional design calculations, a reaction report, and a design warning cell. To design the building, press the auto button on the toolbar and select "make all files on this screen". Note how the program first makes an input file and then makes the corresponding output file. When all the files have been make, and a warning occurred in one or more output files, the warning screen appears and reports the warnings. The designer should go to the output file with the warning to view the warning and decide how to correct the warning. An example of a warning is that you set the girt locations and depth, which resulted in an overstress in the girt. One solution is to let the program determine girt depth or girt location. The Teaching Manual provides advice on resolving warnings. The designer should review the design reports to see that they are satisfied with the building design.

2.7

Detailing the Building Click on the Detailing tab located next to the design tab, this brings up the detailing screen as shown below.


50


Again, note the input cells and the output cells. Many of the cells have the Det name indicating detailing. Building areas use the same preface as with design, including rigid frame, endwall, components, crane, and partitions. WindFrm details the wind bents and wind columns. The BOM cell represents the bill of materials for the building. This program details all those parts of the building that are not detailed by the other programs. There are a number of output cells that prepare summary information from the building detailing. The PltSum file includes a list of all the materials consumed by this job. This list can be used to order raw materials or reduce current inventory. The CZE_Det file contains a list of the C, Z, and Eave strut members, which can be sent to the supplier providing those items for the building. The Ship cell contains the shipping list for the job. The user can control the content and format of each page of the shipping list. The Cost file is a summary of the building cost. It can report either the cost or the selling price for the building. The Contract file contains an agreement to purchase the building. It is of a form and content set by the user. The Letter file is a certification letter signed by the structural engineer that designed or checked the building design. Again, the user sets its content and format.

2.8

Preparing Erection Drawings Note on the tabs that there are three tabs for building (erection) drawings. The files in the first tab are used for all buildings while the files in the second and third tabs are used for more complex or special building features. Select the Drawing 1 tab. This will bring up the screen shown below.



51

Note the input and output cells. Also, note the name abbreviations that match those used in the design screen, namely, sidewall, endwall, roof, crane, and rigid frame. Additional cells include three cells for anchor bolt drawings. Often three anchor bolt drawings are needed, one each for the anchor bolt plan, anchor bolt details, and for reactions. The additional input and output cells for 3Dbuild are located in the upper right corner for a three dimensional drawing of the building Note the cell in the upper left corner labeled DwgCtrl. This cell contains the drawing control file. It is a user set file that contains drawing options and scale factors that are used in preparing these drawings. Multiple drawing control files are available to the user prior to or during the preparation of the erection drawings. To prepare these drawings, press the Auto button and select "make all cells on this screen". When the drawings are complete, view the drawing to determine if they meet your needs. You can edit the drawing by editing the input file and remaking the output file. Another method of editing the drawing is to change one or more detailing methods, or to use the "options" feature for that drawing. Select the Drawing 2 tab. This will bring up the screen shown below.


52


Note there are additional sidewall and endwall drawings. Additional input and output cells include: WallIns is a wall insulation drawing, WallLnr is a drawing of the wall liner panels, KeyDwg serves two purposes, one is for the layout of partition walls and the second is for the layout of multiple buildings, BrcDwg is a brace drawing, PartDwg is for the drawing of each partition wall, and JackDwg is for the drawing of each jack beam. The PartDwg, JackDwg, and WindDwg cells, like the Shop Drawing cells, are just a link to another screen that contains the drawings. For example, double-clicking (or Make) the PartDwg cell will display the screen below. If more drawings need to be displayed, more tabs indicating other pages will be show.



53

The Auto run feature should be used to make all the drawings or just the number needed for this job. Each drawing should be viewed and if necessary modified within MBS. Select the Detail Dwg tab. This will bring up the screen shown below.

Note there are multiple detail drawing cells, from 1 to 23. © 2011 Metal Building Software, Inc

54


The Auto run feature should be used to make all the drawings or just the number needed for this job. Each drawing should be viewed and if necessary modified within MBS. Select the Combined Dwg tab. This will bring up the screen shown below.

These cells provide the options for combined drawings. That is where multiple building components can appear on a single drawing. For example, if you want to use large drawings and you have a small building, you can have both sidewalls and both endwalls on a single sheet. The building components to include on a given sheet are set in the drawing control file and further edited in the combined drawing input file. Combined drawings are seldom used. It is more common to use the other drawings and use smaller drawings for smaller buildings. The other drawings do permit either sidewalls or both endwalls on the same sheet.

2.9

Preparing Shop Drawings Select the Shop Dwg tab and the following screen appears.



55

Note the standard shop drawings are on the left and the fully scaled shop drawings are on the right. The standard shop drawings are to read by individuals while the fully scaled shop drawings are to read by software used in shop fabrication.

2.9.1

Standard Shop Drawings The left columns of cells are for C, Z, Eave strut, constant depth component members, and for endwall framing members. The CZE_Dwg is for the assembled members while the remaining cells are for parts of the members. Those parts are included in the cell name; Web for member webs, Bep for bolted end plates, Stf for stiffeners, and Flg for member flanges. The middle column of cells is for rigid frame members, tapered component members, and crane beams. The top cell is for the assembled member while the remaining cells are for components of the member as defined by the cell name. The Int_dwg is for rigid frame interior columns. The Wnd_Dwg cell is for shop drawings of the wind bents and wind columns. The Clp_Dwg cell is for shop drawings of connection plates. Each cell on this screen represents many shop drawings. Press the M key to open the cell and view the names of the shop drawings. You can use the Auto feature to make all the cells on this screen. You can also process each cell with the options that come from a right click on the cell as shown below.


56


Options include making, editing, viewing, or printing of the input file or output file. When the input file is viewed, one can see many options that are available for the drawings. These options are set in the FRM_DWG.SIZ file for the rigid frame drawings and the CZE_DWG.SIZ file for the other shop drawings. The user sets these files in order for the shop drawings to best meet the needs of the manufacturer.

2.9.2

Fully Scaled Drawings Cells on the fully scaled drawings include a column of cells for the rigid frame and a column of cells for the other members. Each cell represents different components for those members. For example, the RF_WEB is for rigid frame webs. As you view one of these drawings, you will note a red line that represents the shape of the web. This shape is read by shop software that directs the cutting of the web. Web identification data is given in the lower left corner of the drawing.

2.10

Special Programs Select the Special tab and the following screen appears.



57

This screen has many uses. The first two columns of cells use the input and output format. The CmbDwg serves the same purpose as the KeyDwg cell. It can be used for partition wall layout or to illustrate the location of multiple buildings. The Crane cell is used to design crane beams. Now that the program automatically designs crane beams there is less need for these cells. The remaining cells with input and output are stand-alone design programs. They include EW for endwall, SW for sidewall, Roof for roof and bracings, and RF for rigid frame. When the input file is made, the information comes from the building input data. However, as the design output file is made no data is transferred to other parts of MBS. Many different designs can be run on these cells without affecting and of the detailing or drawings. The cells on the right of the output screen are small design programs. These cells are used to prepare the section property data or run special component checks or designs. The C_PROP cell is for section properties of C, Z, and D (double C) members. The similar section properties for welded plate members are from the W_PROP cell. The C_CHECK and W_CHECK cells are for checking the adequacy of a member subject to axial, shear, and moment with given unbraced lengths and yield strength. The checks are made in accordance with different structural design codes. The C refers to C, Z and D members while the W is for welded plate members. The EndPlt cell is used to design bolted end plate connections. The user enters the member size and moment while the program returns the end plate size, number of bolts, and bolt diameter. Similarly, the BasePlt cell is used to design base plates and anchor bolts. The base plates can be pinned connections or moment connections. The last cell, CrnBM_pro, is used to calculate the section properties of crane beams. The crane beams can be made of hot rolled wide flange members, welded plate members, and may have a hot rolled channel member on the top.


Part

III

Entering the Building Data

3


3.1

To Start MBS Windows

59

Double-click on the MBS icon. The 'Get Job' box will appear.

This screen can be used to access the Job Manager. The user has the option of typing the job name or pressing 'Browse' to go to the Job Manager. Checking 'Data File Update' will compare the data files in the chosen job with the data files in the default SIZ2 directory. This will cause the data files in the job to be updated with more recent files.

To change the directory path [PATH]; [EDIT] to alter the status or description shown; [ADD] to add a new job; [DELETE] to remove the job; [SIZ] to update the database files in the job; [ZIP] to zip the highlighted job; [ZIP ALL] to zip all shown jobs independently; [COPY] to copy and rename the job; [INFO] gives directory name, # of files in job, total size and most current file; and [VIEW] shows the 3D graphic view of the job. © 2011 Metal Building Software, Inc

60


The Job Manager contains a list of the Jobs in the designated job directory. Use the mouse or arrow keys to move the blue line, which indicates the job to be selected. Double-click, and the highlighted job will be selected. Additional options are shown at the top of the screen. To create a new job, click on Add and type the new job name.

As you select a job, the job information screen appears. Fill in as much data as is appropriate for the job and click Ok. The Job ID screen format can be altered by the user (MBS_INFO.DEF located in folder C:\MBS\DOC2\). See the MBS Detailing Manual for more specific information.

3.2

Start Files See Appendix 4 Steps to Start a MBS Job and Source of Data for specific information on default files. A graphic representation is located at Appendix A7: MBS Directory Structure and File Sequence. It is advisable, for example, to start with a default job design control file (DesCtrl.in) which is as close to the building to be designed as possible.

3.3

To Enter Building Data

3.3.1

To Activate Building Entry Menu While in a job on the design screen, place the cursor on the DesCtrl cell (highlight in red) and press Ctrl-E, E, or double-click if set in MBS.INI. A picture of this screen and each successive input screen may be referenced at Section 2.3.D INPUT SCREENS. Enter the job title to be used on design and detailing reports. The building editor menu appears. It is a list of the screens for building entry. Click on the desired screen to proceed with building entry. As a general rule the ESC key will exit most MBS screens. * 'Click on' means to move the mouse to that location and press the left mouse key. © 2011 Metal Building Software, Inc


61

NOTE: The above screen capture is shown as an example of all the buttons. The last five buttons in the Partition Wall Book will not be shown if the number of partitions is zero.


62

3.3.2


Screen Layout and Operations

Top line (A):

Name of current building input area and reference *.INI file.

Menu buttons (B):

Click on any of the following: Building categories: Shape/Color, Loads, Wall/Roof, Accessories, Extensions, and Partitions. Graphics button: to view drawings of the building being entered. Menu button: to return to the menu for all the building entry screens. Help button: To provide help on the Windows program.

Menu tabs (C):

Tabs for parts of the active building area. Note the active tab is linked to the main screen below. Click on the desired tab to move to the desired screen, or use Ctrl-PgUp/PgDn to move to the next screen.

Main Screen (D):

This is divided into sections, see the title in the upper left corner. The active section has a white background. Use the PgUp/PgDn keys to move between sections, or click on the desired area to activate that section.

Bottom line (E):

The following data references this job:

- Job Name - Job Description - Job Directory - Today's Date

TRAIN MBS TRAINING MANUAL JOB C:\MBS_JOBS\TRAIN 4/29/08 © 2011 Metal Building Software, Inc


- Units: English (SI) or Metric

63

(blank)

F1 text help Alt-F1 graphic help Data entry locations within a section are called fields. The TAB key is used to move between fields. The order is top to bottom then left to right. Another way to move to a desired field is to click on the field. Entering numeric data: If you move to the cell with the TAB key, enter the number (all numbers should be separated by a space), press the TAB key. The numbers will be saved and you will be at the next field. If you move to the field with a single click, you can use the arrow keys to move to the specific numbers to be edited. Edit the numbers, then move to the next cell with the mouse or the TAB key. If you move to the field with a double click you can enter the new data while overwriting the old data. Selecting from a Pick List: A pick list is available for the field if a down arrow is at the right side of the field. Click on the down arrow and the available options will appear. Click on the desired option and it will be selected. If there are more options than what appear on the list, move the scroll bar on the right to view additional options. Marking a Check Box: Click on the box or label to change the setting. Click again to change back. If you click on the label it will be accented (as seen by the box around the label). Then, the space bar can be used to mark or unmark the check box. Edit Box on list of numbers: Used to enter a list of numbers, where there is not a field for each number.

Click on the field that contains the multiple numbers (for example: frame lines for a rigid frame). An edit line will appear where the numbers can be entered, separate the numbers with the space bar. When the desired data is entered, press the Enter key or click on 'OK'. Edit Box on full line of data: Used where a full line of data is to be entered, such as additional loads, framed openings, and much of the accessory data. Enter the number of data lines and press TAB. Zeros or blank data will appear for each line. Double click on the line or press the enter key and an edit box will appear. Enter the desired data in the first field use the TAB key to move forward to the next field. Shift-TAB will move backward. © 2011 Metal Building Software, Inc

64


To accept the edited data: Press TAB on the last field. The default will be the 'OK' button, then press enter to select 'OK' or, click on the 'OK' button. If you do not edit all the fields, and you wish to discontinue the editing, click on the 'Cancel' button to exit.

3.3.3

Input Screens

BUILDING EDITOR: Enter the Job Title to be used on output reports. Click 'OK'.

3.3.4

Shape




65

66

3.3.4 A


Shape

3.3.4.1.1 Building Shape

BUILDING TYPE 'FF' for a full frame building. 'LT' for a lean to building. BUILDING OPTION '-' Standard 'E' for an erection sequence building (See PE 5-01-3), 'W' for a field welded building (See PE 6-01-9). BUILDING WIDTH, (ft, mm) The width of the building is the out-to-out distance between the sidewall girts on each side of the building. To include panel thickness in the building width, set the panel thickness as the girt © 2011 Metal Building Software, Inc


67

offset. BUILDING LENGTH, (ft, mm) The length of the building is the out-to-out distance between the endwall girts on each end of the building. To include panel thickness in the building length, set the panel thickness as the girt offset. LEFT EAVE HEIGHT, (ft, mm) The vertical distance from the finish floor elevation to the left eave. To decide what part of the building is the left eave you need to first decide which sidewall will be the front sidewall. Building location on the drawings is with the front sidewall along the base of the drawing. Then, as you view the front sidewall from outside the building, the end of the building located on your left is the left endwall. Building cross section dimensions are given as you view the left endwall from outside the building. Therefore, the left eave height is also the back sidewall height. RIGHT EAVE HEIGHT, (ft, mm) The vertical distance from the finish floor elevation to the right eave. Lean-to buildings must have the high side on the front sidewall. PEAK OFFSET, (ft, mm) The horizontal distance from the back side of the building to the building ridge. For a single slope or lean-to building, use the building width. LEFT ROOF SLOPE Use the roof slope in terms of rise in 12 horizontal for imperial units (inches) and rise in 100 horizontal for metric units (mm). SIDEWALL BAY If all sidewall bays are to have the same value, set the bay spacing here. The program will use the closest multiple to the building length. If different sidewall bay values are used, use the desired bay spacing on the bay spacing screen. 3.3.4.1.2 Rigid Frame in Endw all

EXPANDABLE ENDWALL, Lt & Rt 'N' for no rigid frame in endwall, 'Y' if the building framing is to incorporate a rigid frame in the endwall (expandable endwall frame), 'YE' the rigid frame in the endwall to use the common endwall columns as interior rigid frame columns. See PE 2-03-3, 'I' for an endwall that is inset one bay from the end of building, see PE 12-00-4, 'I2' for an endwall that is inset two bays from the end of building, 'I3' for an endwall that is inset three bays from the end of building, 'I4' for an endwall that is inset four bays from the end of building, 'I5' for an endwall that is inset five bays from the end of building, 'I6' for an endwall that is inset six bays from the end of building, 'I7' for an endwall that is inset seven bays from the end of building, 'I8' for an endwall that is inset eight bays from the end of building, or 'I9' for an endwall that is inset nine bays from the end of building.


68


OFFSET, (in, mm) If Lt / Rt Offset was: 'Y'

'I', 'I1' ... 'I9'

Use the distance from end of building to web line on the rigid frame. For a small offset, the endwall columns and girts will frame into the inside flange of the rigid frame. For a larger offset, the endwall columns and girts will bypass the rigid frame. Use the distance from the centerline of frame near the endwall to the outside steel line of the inset endwall.

3.3.4.1.3 Flush Wall

FLUSH WALL; DEPTH, (in, mm) Check the 'Use' box if the following structural items are to have the specified depth: rigid frame sidewall columns, sidewall girts, endwall columns, and endwall girts.



69

3.3.4.1.4 Column Base Elevation

COLUMN BASE ELEVATION For each of the four walls use the distance from the finish floor to the column base. Use a negative value if the column base is below the floor. If necessary, in the input files of the programs you can set unique elevations for each column.

3.3.4.1.5 Building Colors

BUILDING COLORS Use a two character designation for each color. The color choices and the two character codes are in the pull-down menu. These colors are referenced in the DT_COLOR.siz file. In each report where the color is reported, a definition of the two letter designation will be made. This is a 4 letter entry. The first two letters come from the DT_COLOR.siz file and represent the color of the trim. The second 2 letters come from the DT_TRIM.siz file and represent the style of the trim. The STYLEs are specified in the DT_COLOR.siz file using 'ST' as the TYPE in this file. BUILDING STYLES Style is used to choose unique profiles or types of trim. Roof style is for unique ridge caps. Roof trim style is for unique gable trim. © 2011 Metal Building Software, Inc

70


This is a 4 letter entry. The first two letters represent the color of the trim. The second 2 letters come from the DT_TRIM.siz file and represent the style of the trim. The STYLEs are specified in the DT_COLOR.siz file using 'ST' as the TYPE in this file. 3.3.4 B

Bay Spacing



71

COPY BAY ID When a value is not present, then that bay Id is not available to other pull-down lists. Using the pull-down list, the user can select a bay Id number to copy, and then click the Copy Button. COPY BUTTON The information which is entered for the wall will be copied to or from the wall. SETS OF BAYS The number of sets of data necessary to describe the column spacing along the wall. Set to 0 if the endwall column spacing is to be determined by the program. A set of data consists of a bay width and the number of consecutive times that bay width occurs. NUMBER OF BAYS The number of consecutive occurrences of the bay width. Repeat this and the last item as required to fully describe the bay spacing in the wall.


72


WIDTH The bay width. Start with the bay at the left end of the wall (viewed from outside that wall). FRONT/BACK SOLDIER COLUMNS For each sidewall with soldier columns, click the checkbox for that wall and set the bay spacing information for that wall. The bay spacings must align with the roof bay spacings.



3.3.4 C

Rigid Frames


73

74


COPY RIGID FRAME ID When a value is not present, then that rigid frame Id is not available to other pull-down lists. Using the pull-down list, the user can select a rigid frame Id number to copy, and then click the Copy Button. COPY BUTTON This will fill in the Frame Type, Frame Option, Load Width, Symmetry, Column Shape, and Rafter Shape from the copied rigid frame. The program will jump to the # Frame Lines for the next input item. FRAME TYPE 'RF' for the typical rigid frame, 'LT' for the lean to frame with a moment connection at the top of the column, 'BC' for the lean to frame with a pin on the inside face of the column, 'TB' for a tapered beam frame consisting of a level bottom chord on the rafter with a © 2011 Metal Building Software, Inc


'HP' 'SR' 'TF' 'TH' 'TR' 'BM'

75

constant depth column, for a horizontal lower flange on the rafter at the ridge, for the semi-rigid moment connection at the inside face of each sidewall column, for a T frame, for a Tee Hanger frame (open front sidewall), for a Tee hanger Reverse frame (open back sidewall), and for a beam frame.

LOAD WIDTH The effective loading width to be used for the design of the frame. For a two bay building with bypass purlins, the default effective load is increased by 25 percent to account for purlin continuity. FRAME OPTION Use 'D' if the rigid frame columns are made from double C cold-rolled sections, see PE 702-2. 'U' if the rigid frame depths are to be taken from the DS_FRAME.SIZ file, see PE 801-9. '-' for all other cases. FRAME SYMMETRY Use 'N' and the frame will not be symmetrical. For a frame to be symmetrical, both the building shape and interior columns must be symmetrical. 'Y' and the frame will be symmetrical on the input file, the designed frame may not be symmetrical. 'S' and the frame will be symmetrical on both the input file and in the designed frame. COLUMN SHAPE Use C for constant depth member, T for tapered depth member, TC for tapered and then constant (See PE 4-11-4), R for hot rolled members, and M for multiple depth (See PE 11-02-5) RAFTER SHAPE Use C for constant depth member, T for tapered depth member, TC for tapered and then constant depth member, R for hot rolled member, H and the TF rafter will be horizontal, and HC and the HP rafter will be constant depth and then horizontal. END SUPPORT (Left) 'P' for Pinned connection at base of columns, 'FI' for Fixed connection at base with anchor bolts Inside and outside of flanges, 'FO' for Fixed connection at base with anchor bolts Outside of flange only, or 'F4' for Fixed column base using 4 bolts per row. END SUPPORT (Right) © 2011 Metal Building Software, Inc

76


'P' 'FI' 'FO' 'F4'

for Pinned connection at base of columns, for Fixed connection at base with anchor bolts Inside and outside of flanges, for Fixed connection at base with anchor bolts Outside of flange only, or for Fixed column base using 4 bolts per row.

NO. OF FRAME LINES The number of frames of this frame Id to be used in this building. Expandable endwall frames can be specified as a separate frame type, such as Rigid Frame #2, since the expandable frame will be detailed for the connection to the endwall columns. FRAME LINES The number of the frame lines where this frame is to be located. The frame lines start with frame number one at the left end of the building. Use a space between frame line numbers (i. e. 1 2 3 etc.). When Soldier Columns are present, then the frame lines are based on Roof Bays that are where the FRAMEs actually occur. For example, ID=1 is at the left endwall and ID=2 is the next rigid frame location based on roof bay spacing.



3.3.4 D

Interior Columns


77

78


COPY INTERIOR COLUMN ID When a value is not present, then that rigid frame Id is not available to other pull-down lists. Using the pull-down list, the user can select a rigid frame Id number to copy, and then click the Copy Button. COPY BUTTON This will fill in the Column Type, Rotate Column, Column Shape, Top Connection, Bottom Connection, and Base Elevation from the copied interior column. The program will jump to the # Locations for the next input item. COLUMN TYPE (associated design also shown) Use 'R' for hot rolled wide flange section, 'P' for pipe section, 'W' for welded wide flange section, 'T' for a square tube section, or



79

'S' for special shape that is a wide flange member with variable depth. ROTATE COLUMN For the 'W' or 'R' column type, use Y if the column web is in a plane perpendicular to the plane of the frame, else N. The 'P' and 'T' tubes can not be rotated, use N. For the 'S' column type the member cannot be rotated. If the column location is to the mid column depth, use 'N'. If you have a tapered column and you want one side of the column to be vertical and the other side of the column to be tapered, then use R if the column is to be to the right of the dimension line and L if the column is to be to the left of the dimension line. COLUMN SHAPE 'C' used except for the special column type, then select as follows: 'T' if the column is to have a single taper, 'Y' if the column is to have more than one taper, 'S' if the column is to be stepped. The minimum and maximum depths and the location of depth points on the columns comes from the DS_RFDEP.siz file for COT, COS, COC, and COY span types. TOP CONNECTION The connection type for the top of interior columns: 'P' for Pinned connection at top of column or 'F' for Fixed connection at top of column. BASE CONNECTION The connection type for the base of interior columns: 'P' for Pinned connection at base of columns, 'FI' for Fixed connection at base with anchor bolts Inside and outside of flanges, 'FO' for Fixed connection at base with anchor bolts Outside of flange only, or 'F4' for Fixed connection at base with 4 bolts per row and anchor bolts inside and outside of flanges. BASE ELEVATION, (in, mm) The distance from finish floor to the interior column base plate. A negative value places the base plate below the floor. NO. OF LOCATIONS The number of interior column locations to be used with this frame. LOCATIONS, (ft, mm) The distance from the back side of the building to each column.


80

3.3.4 E


Jack Beam



81

NO. The number of jack beams to be used. ID The counter for the jack beam beginning with 1 through the total number of beams. BAY ID, START Start bay of roof bays for the jack beam location. BAY ID, END End bay of roof bays for the jack beam location. OFFSET, (ft, mm) Distance from the back sidewall to the centerline of the jack beam. A value of zero will locate the beam at the back sidewall, and a value of the building width will locate the beam at the


82


front sidewall. All other locations must allow the jack beam to connect to a rigid frame interior column at each end of the jack beam. HEIGHT (ft, mm) Distance from the floor to the top of jack beam. A value of zero will locate the beam directly below the rafter for interior column locations, and near the eave for jack beams located along either sidewall. User can specify heights which are used by the program. BEAM TYPE The member type for the jack beam. 'R' - Hot-rolled I-beam (DS_RFRM.siz) 'W' - Constant depth welded plate I-beam (DS_WFRM.siz) 'T1' - single taper where depth locations are based on DS_RFDEP.siz 'T1' entries 'T2' - double taper where depth locations are based on DS_RFDEP.siz 'T2' entries BRACE TYPE Bracing Type where: 'C' - Cable bracing 'R' - Rod bracing BRACE LOCATION, (ft, mm) The distance from the eave to the bracing point. The nearest purlin location to the entered value will be the bracing point. The strut and end of bracing will be located at this distance from the eave.



3.3.4 F

83

Special Shape

NOTE: When Special Surface is used, Width, Eave Height, and Slope are not used from Shape screen.


84


NUMBER OF SURFACES The number of outside surfaces that appear on a cross section of the building. Use zero and this data line will not be used. The building shape will be obtained from screen 1. X/Y COORDINATES, (in, mm) The X and Y coordinate of the building surface intersections. Consider the lower left corner of the building to be at coordinate 0,0 and do not use that point.



3.3.5

Loads

3.3.5 A

Code, Loads

85

3.3.5.1.1 Building Code

CALC BUTTON See PE 11-03-7 for program to retrieve building code and climatic data. Help is also available within the Climate Preprocessing screen. Climatic data retrieved corresponds to the building code and the required MBS load screen fields. WIND CODE Click on the down arrow and select the code from the menu. ASCE ASNZ

American Society of Civil Engineers (1990, 1993, 1995, 1998, 2002, 2005) Australia and New Zealand Code (2002)


86


BCBC BOCA CBC CECS CFBC CFE CHNA DIN DWC EC1 FBC IBC I875 MBMA MCC MSC NBC NCBC NYBC OBBC PN PRC SBC UBC VEN WBC

British Columbia Building Code of Canada (1992) Building Officials and Code Administrators (1987, 1990, 1993, 1996, 1999) California Building Code (1998, 2001, 2007) China Code CECS 102.02 (2002) Canadian Farm Building Code (1995) Mexican Wind Code (1993) China Code CECS 102.98 (1998) German Wind Code, DIN 1055-4 (2006) Dutch Wind Code (1990) EuroCode 1: Actions on Structures Part 1-4: General Actions - Wind Actions Florida Building Code (2001, 2004) International Building Code (2000, 2003, 2006, 2009) India Standard IS 875 (1997) Metal Building Manufacturers Association (1986, 1990, 1996, 2002, 2006, 2010) Mexico City Code (1991) Massachusetts State Code (1993, 2001) National Building Code of Canada (1990, 1995, 2005) North Carolina Building Code (1996, 1999) New York Building Code (1989) Ohio Basic Building Code (1995, 1998) Poland National (1977) Puerto Rico Code (1987, 1998, 2011) Standard Building Code (1987, 1991, 1994, 1997, 1999) Uniform Building Code (1991, 1994, 1997) Venezuela Building Code (1999) Wisconsin Building Code (1991, 2000, 2002)

CLOSED/OPEN Use one of the available options for each Building Code as listed in the help box. EXPOSURE Use one of the available options for each Building Code as listed in the help box. IMPORTANCE FACTOR - SEISMIC Use the importance factor for the seismic load. IMPORTANCE FACTOR - WIND Use the importance factor for the wind load. SEISMIC ZONE / DESIGN CATEGORY Use one of the available options for the listed Building Code. The Figures and Tables referenced in the rightmost column pertain to the Building Code not MBS figures or tables.



Seismic Zone / Design Category

Code ASCE

87

Seismic Coefficient

1990 1993 1995 1998

0, 1, 2, 3, 4 A, B, C, D, E, F [1]

2002

A, B, C, D, E, F [1]

2005

A, B, C, D, E, F

ASNZ

2002

Not available

Not available

BCBC

1992

-

Z, Za, Zv

BOCA

1987 1990 1993 1996

0, 1, 2, 3, 4 0, 1, 2, 3, 4 -

1999

-

0 0 Aa; See Figure 1612.1.3(2) Aa; See Figure 1610.1.3(2) if DS_BUILD(roof 76) = 1, then Use Ca, See ASCE Table 9.1.4.2.4 Aa; See Figure 1610.1.3(2) if DS_BUILD(roof 77) = 1, then Use Ca, See ASCE Table 9.1.4.2.4

CBC

1998 2001 2007

0, 1, 2A, 2B, 3, 4 0, 1, 2A, 2B, 3, 4 A, B, C, D, E, F [1]

Ca; See Table 16Q and 16I Ca; See Table 16Q and 16I Ss * Fa; See CBC 2007

CECS

2002

-

Adjusted Horizontal Earthquake Influence Factor (GBS0011-2001)

CFBC

1995

-

Z, Za, Zv

CFE

1993

A, B, C, D

0; See Table 93 CFE-1

CHNA

1998

0, 1, 2A, 2B, 3, 4

See Code

DIN

2006

Not available

Not available

DWC

1990

0, 1, 2, 3, 4

0

EC1

0 Aa; See Figure 9-1 Ca; See Table 9.1.4.2.4 Ss * Fa; See Table 9.4.1.2.4.a Figure 9.4.1.1(a) Ss * Fa; See Table 9.4.1.2.4.a Figure 9.4.1.1(a) Ss * Fa; See Table 11.4-1 Figure 22-1

Not available

Not available

FBC

2001 2004

A, B, C, D, E, F [1] B, C, D, E, F [1]

Ss * Fa; See ASCE 7-98 Ss * Fa; See ASCE 7-02

IBC

2000

A, B, C, D, E, F [1]

2003

A, B, C, D, E, F [1]

2006

A, B, C, D, E, F

2009

A, B, C, D, E, F

Ss * Fa; Figure Ss * Fa; Figure Ss * Fa; Figure Ss * Fa; Figure

1997

II, III, IV, V

I875


0

See Table 1615.1.2(1), 1615(1) and others See Table 1615.1.2(1), 1615(1) and others See Table 1613.5.3(1) 1613.5(1) See Table 1613.5.3(1) 1613.5(1)

88


MBMA

1986 1990 1996 2002 2006 2010

0, 0, A, A, A,

1, 2, 3, 4 1, 2, 3, 4

MCC

1991

I, II, III

C, from Table 7.1

MSC

1993 2001

-

Aa Aa; See Section 1612.2.3

NBC

1990 1995 2005

A, B, C, D, E, F

Z, Za, Zv Z, Za, Zv See Canadian Code section

NCBC

1996 1999

-

Aa; See Figure 1607.1.5B Aa; See Figure 1607.1.5B

NYBC

1989

-

Aa; See MBS Design Manual Seismic Section G (pg 6-70)

OBBC

1995 1998

-

Aa; See BOCA-93 Aa; See OBBC-98 Figure 1610.1.3 (2) if DS_BUILD(roof 82) = 1, then use Ca, See ASCE

PN

1977

0, 1, 2, 3, 4

0

PRC

1987 1998 2011

0, 1, 2, 3, 4 0, 1, 2A, 2B, 3, 4 A, B, C, D, E, F

0 Ca; See UBC-97 Tables 16Q and 16I Ss * Fa; See Table 1613.5(13) Figures 1 and 2

SBC

1987 1991 1994 1997 1999

0, 1, 2, 3, 4 0, 1, 2, 3, 4 -

0 0 Aa; See Figure 1607.1.5B Aa; See Figure 1607.1.5B Aa; See Figure 1607.1.5B

UBC

1991 1994 1997

0, 1, 2A, 2B, 3, 4 0, 1, 2A, 2B, 3, 4 0, 1, 2A, 2B, 3, 4

0 0 Ca; See Tables 16Q and 16I

VEN

1999

0, 1, 2, 3, 4

0

WBC

1991 2000 2002

0, 1, 2, 3, 4 0, 1, 2, 3, 4 A, B, C, D, E, F [1]

0 0 Ss * Fa; See IBC-00 Table 1615.1.2(1) Figure 1615(1) and others

B, C, D, E, F [1] B, C, D, E, F [1] B, C, D, E, F [1]

0 0 Ca; See Table 7.4.1.1 Ss * Fa; See IBC 2000 Ss * Fa; See IBC 2006 Ss * Fa; See IBC 2006

[1] Seismic Design Category: use the most severe from the following tables. ASCE98 Table 9.4.2.1a and 9.4.2.1b CBC07 Table 1613.5.6(1) and 1613.5.6(2) IBC03 Table 1616(1) and 1616(2) IBC06 Table 1613.5.6(1) and 1613.5.6(2) © 2011 Metal Building Software, Inc


MBMA02 WBC02

89

IBC: Table 1616.3(1) and Table 1616.3(2) IBC: Table 1616.3(1) and Table 1616.3(2)

Seismic Design Category is used for adjusting seismic factors according to the rules defined in DS_Const.SIZ (see PE 4-04-6). SEISMIC COEFFICIENT Use one of the available coefficients for the listed Building Code. See right column of the table above for Seismic Coefficient per Code. NOTE: The 96 and 99 BOCA codes permit the use of ASCE 95. Both the BOCA and ASCE codes are available as a user option, see PE 7-00-18. TEMPERATURE CHANGE If a change in temperature is to be considered in each of the design load combinations, set the temperature change here. Use Fahrenheit for English jobs and centigrade for metric. See PE 3-06-2, 4-07-3, or 6-07-7. To get a positive or negative change in temperature, set up load factors in the RF_Code.Yr file. See PE 6-07-7. CANADIAN CODE (Not shown by default)

NBC 90 and NBC 95

NBC 05

For NBC 90 and NBC 95 CANADIAN CODE LOADING FACTORS (SEE APPENDIX C OF NBC 95): Wind 10 Year: Hourly wind pressure, 10 year return period Wind 30 Year: Hourly wind pressure, 30 year return period Seismic Data: Seismic v Zonal velocity ratio. Seismic Za Acceleration related seismic zone Seismic Zv Velocity related seismic zone Seismic I Importance factor, see section 3.1.13 © 2011 Metal Building Software, Inc

90


1.5 = post disaster buildings. 1.3 = schools 1.0 = all other buildings For NBC 05 Wind 50 Year: Hourly wind pressure, 50 year return period Seismic Data: Sa(0.2) = Spectral acceleration 0.2 second Sa(0.5) = Spectral acceleration 0.5 second Sa(1.0) = Spectral acceleration 1.0 second Sa(2.0) = Spectral acceleration 2.0 second 3.3.5.1.2 Building Loads

DEAD LOAD The roof dead load. This includes items supported by the roof purlins, typically: panels, purlins, and insulation. (Do not include the rigid frame weight since the program will generate that load.) You need to estimate the purlin weight. However, the roof design reports the purlin weight, which you can use to adjust this dead load. By setting the dead load in this way, the rigid frame can be designed without first designing the roof framing. LIVE LOAD The roof live load as reported on a horizontal projection. ROOF SNOW LOAD The roof design snow load. The larger of live load and snow load is used for building design. Crane loads and seismic loads are combined with snow load. COLLATERAL LOAD The additional dead load that may or may not be on the building at sometime in the future. WIND SPEED, BASIC WIND PRESSURE You can enter the design wind speed or the design wind pressure. For those values less than 50 psf (2.39 kN/m2 ), the program considers it to be a basic wind pressure. Larger values are considered to be a wind velocity. A few wind codes require that the basic wind pressure be entered rather than a wind speed. See the code description in the MBS Design Manual. Code

Basic Wind Speed / Pressure Reference

ASCE

1990 1995 1998 2002 2005

Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure

1, pg 13 6-1 pg 18 6-1 pg 34-38 6-1 pg 36-40 6-1 pg 32-36

ASNZ

2002

BCBC

1992

See 1990 NBC

BOCA

1987 1990 1993

Figure 1112.3.2, pg 253 Figure 1112.3.2, pg 270 Figure 1611.3, pg 160



Code 1996 1999

Basic Wind Speed / Pressure Reference Figure 1609.3, pg 170, if DS_BUILD(roof76) =1, use ASCE 7-95 Figure 1609.3, pg 175, if DS_BUILD(roof77) =1, use ASCE 7-95

CBC

1998 2001 2007

Figure 16-1 Figure 16-1 Figure 1609

CECS

2002

See Code

CFBC

1995

See NBC 1995 Code

CFE

1993

See Code

CHNA

1998

See Code

DWC

1990

See Code, Enter values in Dutch Wind Code box

FBC

2001 2004

Figure 1606, pg 168

IBC

2000 2003 2006 2009

Figure Figure Figure Figure

I875

1997

See Figure 1 of IS 875 Code

MBMA

1986 1990 1996 2002 2006 2010

Section A14, pg 264-287 Figure 5.1, pg 21 Figure 5.2, pg I-5-3 or Appendix 22 IBC 2000, Figure 1609 IBC 2006, Figure 1608.2 IBC 2006, Figure 1608.2

MCC

1991

See Code

MSC

1993 2001

Figure 1112.1A, 1112.1B, 1112.1C See Code

NBC

1990 1995 2005

Supplemental Data Manual Appendix C pg 480-497 Volume 2, Division B, Appendix C, Table C-2

NCBC

1996 1999

See 1990 ASCE Table 1606, pg. 380

NYBC

1989

Table V-803 and VI-803

OBBC

1995 1998

See 1993 BOCA 80 MPH per Code Section 1609.3

PN

1977

See Code

PRC

1987 1998 2011

Table PRC-1 See 1995 ASCE Figure 1609, pg 321

SBC

1987 1991 1994 1997

Figure Figure Figure Figure


1609, 1609, 1609, 1609,

1205, 1205, 1606, 1606,

pg pg pg pg

pg pg pg pg

314-315 284-288 294-298 320-324

52 290 382 218

91

92


Code

Basic Wind Speed / Pressure Reference

1999

Figure 1606, pg 212

UBC

1991 1994 1997

Figure 23-1, pg 193 Figure 16-1, pg 2-40 Figure 16-1, pg 2-36

VEN

1999

Figure 5.1

WBC

1991 2000 2002

Minimum 20 psf, pg 144 Comm 53.12 pg. 71 Figure 1609

LOAD REDUCTION Place a check in the box if the live load reduction is to be taken. The live load reduction is in accordance with Section 2306 of the 1991 Uniform Building Code. That is, for loaded area of 200 ft2 (18.6 m2 ) or less use 20 psf (0.957 kN/m2 ), for loaded areas greater than 200 and up to 600 (55.7 m2 ) use 16 psf (0.766 kN/m2 ), and for loaded areas greater than 600 ft2 use 12 psf (0.574 kN/m2 ). For ASCE/IBC related codes, see PE 5-04-8. The rigid frame loaded area is the building width times the sum of one-half the bay width on each side of the frame. If multiple frames have different load widths, the program will use the smaller load width for the frames. The endwall-loaded area is one-half the sidewall bay near endwall times smallest endwall bay width. EAVE EXTENSION, FACIA, CANOPY, PARTITION LOADS (The term extension will refer to eave extensions, canopies, and facia attachment beam) DEAD LOAD (psf, kN/m2 ) The extension dead load. This includes items supported by the extension beam, typically: panels, roof purlins, girts, and soffit purlins. When using the dead load of the facia included the area of the facia face. (Do not include the attachment beam weight since the program will generate that load.) You need to estimate the purlin weight (and girt if applicable). However, the roof design reports the purlin weight, which you can use to adjust this dead load. SNOW LOAD, SW (psf, kN/m2 ) The sidewall extension snow load as reported on a horizontal projection. If roof and soffit panel is not used for facias, then attachment beam will be designed with no snow load. The larger of roof snow and extension snow is used for eave extension/canopy design. NOTE: Special eave / overhang requirements may exist per building code. For Example UBC: 2 * roof snow load BOCA: 60 psf snow load, minimum (see code for criteria) Snow drifting conditions may also exist on lower roofs, canopies, and facias should be included.



93

SNOW LOAD, EW (psf, kN/m2 ) The endwall extension snow load as reported on a horizontal projection. If roof and soffit panel is not used for facias, then attachment beam will be designed with no snow load. Snow loads due to snow drift conditions may be entered here if greater than roof snow load. The larger of roof snow and extension snow is used for eave extension/canopy design. Snow drifting conditions may also exist on lower roofs, canopies, and facias should be included. PARTITION LOADS WIND (psf, kN/m2 ) The design wind pressure for partitions. This is usually the minimum design pressure for portions of the buildings as specified in the building code. Set to 0.00 to use the outside wall wind loads. If you want a zero design load, use a number near zero, like 0.1. 3.3.5.1.3 Structural Code

The structural code is activated by entering these lines in the DESED.INI file. [SECTION] StructCodeSec=1 [FIELD] StructType=1 StructCold=1 StructHot=1

To use the structural code, first select the Code Type. Then, select the code and year for cold rolled design and for hot rolled design. See PE 1-02-1 for additional information. For the EC3 code there is an additional entry, country code.


94

3.3.5 B


Wall Loads

COPY WALL ID: All wall Id numbers are available to other pull-down lists. Using the pull-down list, the user can select a wall Id number to copy, and then click the Copy button. COPY BUTTON This will fill in all the information from the copied wall Id. It is presumed that one of the items will be modified to make this entry unique from the copied wall Id. After the Copy button is clicked, the user can through each entry and modify the information to make the item unique from the copied line. WALL DEAD, (psf, kN/m2 ): Sidewall and endwall dead load to be used in calculated seismic forces. If you want to use a sidewall and endwall dead load other than what is defined in DS_BUILD(roof 33) and DS_BUILD(roof 34), then use that value here. If DS_BUILD values are 0.00, the program © 2011 Metal Building Software, Inc


95

will default to 2 psf in Imperial units and 0.0956 kN/m² in metric units dead load. SEISMIC IN-PLANE DEAD LOAD FORCE: Used to indicate whether the dead load should be used in the seismic lateral force (in-plane) calculations. The program defaults to Yes as checked. Uncheck if in-plane seismic dead should not be used. COLUMN WIND: Checkbox should remain checked/selected if columns, girts, and wall panels are to carry wind. Uncheck if wind is to be removed. GIRT SEISMIC (Y, N) Used to indicate whether the wall dead load should be used in calculating a seismic load on girts. The program defaults to No as unchecked. Check if seismic load is to be considered on girts. NOTE: The seismic coefficient must be set in DS_CONST.siz. See also PE 4-06-7.


96

3.3.5 C


Additional Loads



97

Enter the number of data lines. Enter data for each line. COPY ADDITIONAL LOAD ID Using the pull-down list, the user can select additional load Id number to copy, and then click the Copy button. COPY BUTTON This will fill in all the additional load information from the copied additional load Id. It is presumed that one of the items will be modified to make this entry unique from the copied additional load Id. After the Copy button is clicked, the user can through each entry and modify the information to make the item unique from the copied line. GRAPHIC BUTTON Selecting an entry and clicking this button will bring up a window showing the load in a


98


graphical view. Only one entry at a time can be viewed in this matter. NUMBER OF DATA LINES The number of data lines which are necessary to call out the additional items.

FRAME LOAD The program to consider the design loads specified. EW_L EW_R EW_* ROOF RF_1 RF_2 RF_3 RF_4 RF_5 RF_6 RF_* BRAC BUILD

for endwall design left for endwall design right for both endwalls for roof design for rigid frame design 1 for rigid frame design 2 for rigid frame design 3 for rigid frame design 4 for rigid frame design 5 for rigid frame design 6 for rigid frame design 1 through 6 for longitudinal bracing global building load for DRIFT and SLIDE, see also PE 8-08-1

LOAD TYPE The load type for each entry. C D I

W R F

for concentrated surface load (RFDES, exterior columns or rafters and EWDES, rafters) or for a concentrated purlin load (ROOFDES). for distributed surface load (RFDES) or distributed rafter (EWDES) or purlin load (ROOFDES). for concentrated endwall column load (EWDES) or concentrated rigid frame interior column load (RFDES). Left corner column is Column Id number 1 for EWDES and left most interior column is Column Id number 1 for RFDES. for distributed endwall column load (EWDES) or distributed rigid frame interior column load (RFDES). for longitudinal bracing load (BRAC) that is transferred to the eave for longitudinal bracing load (BRAC) that is transferred to the floor or base



99

BASIC LOAD The load type for which this basic load is a part of. The load will be applied using the coefficient for the design loads section of the design program input file. When the coefficient is 1.00 the full basic load is applied with the full regular basic load. DEAD COLLAT LIVE SNOW WINDL1 WINDR1 WINDL2 WINDR2 WINDP WINDS SEIS WINDL WINDR SEISL SEISR LWIND1 LWIND2

for load to apply with all dead load cases for load to apply with all collateral load cases. for load to apply with all live load cases. (Do not use for floor beams. Instead use Rigid Frame Input line). for load to apply with all snow load cases. for load to apply with all wind from the left, case one load cases (RFDES and EWDES). for load to apply with all wind from the right, case one load cases (RFDES and EWDES). for load to apply with all wind from the left, case two load cases (RFDES and EWDES). for load to apply with all wind from the right, case two load cases (RFDES and EWDES). for load to apply with wind pressure case in endwall column design (EWDES). for load to apply with wind suction case in endwall column design (EWDES). for load to apply with all seismic load cases. (Apply only horizontal loads with positive sign). for longitudinal bracing (BRAC) wind load in the direction as positive from the left for longitudinal bracing (BRAC) wind load in the direction as positive from the right for longitudinal bracing (BRAC) seismic load in the direction as positive from the left for longitudinal bracing (BRAC) seismic load in the direction as positive from the right for wind load applied to the roof surface resulting from the longitudinal wind direction, internal pressure coefficient used. Applied to endwall and rigid frames. for wind load applied to the roof surface resulting from the longitudinal wind direction, internal suction coefficient used. Applied to endwall and rigid frames.

ORIENTATION If DRIFT and SLIDE are defined, then orientation is available for loads. L - Longitudinal, tapered or uniform for a portion of the roof length, T - Transverse, tapered or uniform for a portion of the roof width SURFACE/COLUMN The surface number that the load is applied to, or use the column ID number for interior endwall or interior rigid frame columns. Exterior rigid frame columns and rafters require surface numbers. The left most surface when looking at the wall from outside the building is Surface number 1. Column Id number 1 is the left corner column for endwalls and the left © 2011 Metal Building Software, Inc

100


most interior column for rigid frames. Using a surface number equal to 0 for a roof design load will result in a concentrated (Load Type C) load or a distributed (Load Type D) load being applied to all roof surfaces. For Drift and Slide loads, the roof surface number must be defined. When BRAC frame type is used, then this represents wall Id. Wall Id 1 left endwall 2 front sidewall 3 right endwall 4 back sidewall Fx / W1 The horizontal force for concentrated loads or distributed load starting value. Positive force is to the right for concentrated load and outward for distributed load. For IBC/ASCE based codes, the seismic load should be the unfactored force (i.e. without Omega ( )). NOTE: Roof purlin design units are (lb/ft or N/m) for concentrated load and (lbs/ft² or kN/m²) for distributed loads. Rigid frame and endwall design units are (Kips or kN) for concentrated loads and (Kips/ft or kN/m) for distributed loads. Fy / W2 The vertical force for concentrated loads or distributed load ending value. Positive force is upwards for concentrated load and outward for distributed load. NOTE: Roof purlin design units are (lb/ft or N/m) for concentrated load and (lbs/ft² or kN/m²) for distributed loads. Rigid frame and endwall design units are (Kips or kN) for concentrated loads and (Kips/ft or kN/m) for distributed loads. MOMENT / COEFFICIENT For concentrated loads, this is the moment value where positive is counter-clockwise. This is applicable for rigid frame, endwall, and soldier column. The units are ft-kip and N-m. For distributed loads, the 'CO' is the coefficient that is multiplied by the perpendicular load to obtain the load parallel to the surface. For example, a 1:12 gable roof pitch is +0.08333 on Surface 2 and -0.08333 on Surface 3. dx, dy / Dl1, Dl2 For concentrated loads, use the dx value. Use the distance to the force in the x and y axis as measured from: - the start of the surface for EWDES, RFDES, and BRAC. - the base of the interior column in EWDES, RFDES, and BRAC. - the start of the purlin run for ROOFDES. For distributed loads, use the dx value.



101

Use the distance to the start (D1) of the distributed load as measured from: - the start of the surface for EWDES and RFDES. - the base of the interior column in EWDES and RFDES. - the start of the purlin run for ROOFDES. NOTE: The start of the surface is the left most portion when looking at the wall from outside the building. Right click for graphics, then file and Print for paper copy as shown below.


102

3.3.5 D


Crane Loads



103

Click on crane button 1. Enter crane data. Click on the next crane button and repeat. COPY CRANE ID All crane Id numbers are available to other pull-down lists. Using the pull-down list, the user can select a crane Id number to copy, and then click the Copy button. COPY BUTTON This will fill in all the information from the copied crane Id. It is presumed that one of the items will be modified to make this entry unique from the copied crane Id. After the Copy button is clicked, the user can through each entry and modify the information to make the item unique from the copied line. FRAME ID


104


The frame Id for the frame which will support the crane loads. FRAME COLUMN BAY The number of the frame bay that contains the crane. Bays are numbered from left to right, as viewed from the left end of the building. For a frame with no interior columns, the bay number is 1. CRANE TYPE Use one of these crane types: 'MR' for mono rail, 'TG' for top run girder, 'UG' for underhung girder, or 'SG' for single gantry [NOT ACTIVE]. CAPACITY The crane capacity. (tons, kN). ADDITIONAL COLUMN 'Y' if, at the sidewall columns, an additional column is to be placed directly below the rail beam, 'N' if there are not additional columns, 'L' for additional column only at left side of the frame bay, 'R' for additional column only at right side of the frame bay, or 'B' for additional columns at both sides of the frame bay. RAIL LOCATION (ft, mm) ELEVATION Distance from floor line to top of beam. XL, LEFT SIDE OFFSET Distance from left side of the building (or bay line) to crane rail. CRANE SPAN Horizontal distance between rail beams. XR, RIGHT RAIL OFFSET Distance from the right crane rail to the right side of the building (or bay line). CRANE OPERATION 'P' for a pendant operation or 'C' for a cab operation. CRANE POWER For each item listed, use 'E' for electric power or 'H' for hand power. USE CRANE TABLES Use 'Y' if the crane table data is to be used, else use 'N'. The crane table contains default data for the items listed below. If specific crane data is not available from the customer, then the crane table data can be used. The Crane Table file is defined in file DS_CRANE.siz. This file is stored in the default directory for \MBS\SIZ2. When your Span, Capacity, Crane Type, or Bay Spacing is exceeded, then crane weights and wheel base must be input by the user.



105

CRANE WEIGHT The weight for the bridge and also for the hoist plus trolley. WHEEL BASE (ft/mm) The distance (as measured in the plane of bridge movement) between the support wheels on the bridge. RAIL BEAM DEAD LOAD (lb/ft, kN/m) Use the weight of the crane rail plus the crane beam. 3.3.5 E

Crane Systems


106


3.3.5.5.1 Crane Systems - Layout

NUMBER OF CRANE SYSTEMS The quantity of crane runway systems to be defined. A unique system id is required if the crane type, orientation, or elevation is different. SYSTEM ID Starting with 1 as the first runway system defined, and numbered consecutively through the total number of runway systems. COPY SYSTEM ID The System Id from a previously defined System to copy to the active System Id. CRANE TYPE 'TG' for top run girder, 'MR' for mono-rail

[NOT ACTIVE] © 2011 Metal Building Software, Inc


'UG' for under hung girder 'SG' for single gantry

107

[NOT ACTIVE] [NOT ACTIVE]

ORIENTATION The runway orientation. 'L' for Longitudinal runway - Runway beams run along the length of the building. 'T' for Transverse runway - Runway beams run along the width of the building. NOT ACTIVE]

[

ELEVATION (ft, mm) Distance from floor line to top of crane runway beam (top running) and, Distance from the floor line to bottom of runway beam [under hung - NOT ACTIVE] OFFSET (ft, mm) Distance from back sidewall to the left crane rail for Longitudinal runway systems, Distance from left endwall to the left crane rail for Transverse runway systems. [NOT ACTIVE] SPAN (ft, mm) Horizontal distance between left and right rail beams defines the crane bridge span. START (ft, mm) Distance from the left endwall to the start of the Longitudinal runway system, Distance from the back sidewall to the start of the Transverse runway system. ACTIVE] END (ft, mm) Distance from the left endwall to the end of the Longitudinal runway system, Distance from the back sidewall to the end of the Transverse runway system. ACTIVE]

[NOT

[NOT

3.3.5.5.2 Crane Support

RUNWAY BEAM BEAM TYPE The runway beam type. 'RC' as the beam type consisting of a 'R' shaped steel beam and a hot rolled channel, 'SC' as the beam type consisting of a 'S' shaped steel beam and a hot rolled channel, 'WC' as the beam type consisting of a 'W' member (welded plates) steel beam and a hotrolled channel, 'WB' as the beam type consisting of a 'W' member (welded plates) steel beam, 'RB' as the beam type consisting of a 'R' (hot-rolled) shaped steel beam, 'PC' as the beam type consisting of an unequal flange plate beam with a hot rolled channel. This entry requires adding section properties to the DS_CRNBM.siz file. See PE 702-11 and 6-00-5 for specifying this beam type. 'TC' as the beam type consisting of a beam without a top flange with a hot rolled channel. This entry requires adding section properties to the DS_CRNBM.siz file. See PE 702-11 and 6-00-5 forspecifying this beam type. 'PB' as the beam type consisting of an unequal flange plate beam without a hot rolled channel. This entry requires adding section properties to the DS_CRNBM.siz file. See PE 7-02-11 and 6-00-5 for specifying this beam type. © 2011 Metal Building Software, Inc

108


BEAM OPTION FOR FUTURE USE. DEPTH OPTION FOR FUTURE USE. BEAM DEPTH, MINIMUM (in, mm) If the user requires that the crane beam be made from a specified range of depth of wide flange beams, then use that range in depth. These depths are compared to the nominal beam depth given in the DS_CRNBM.siz file. BEAM DEPTH, MAXIMUM (in, mm) If the user requires that the crane beam be made from a specified range of depth of wide flange beams, then use that range in depth. These depths are compared to the nominal beam depth given in the DS_CRNBM.siz file. AUXILIARY BEAM The auxiliary beam is used to support the runway beam between endwall columns. Indicate if auxiliary beams are to be used in the left and right endwall. BEAM TYPE The auxiliary beam type. The available auxiliary beams are: R - hot rolled wide flange section, W - welded wide flange sections. BEAM OPTION FOR FUTURE USE. DEPTH OPTION FOR FUTURE USE. BEAM DEPTH, MINIMUM (in, mm) If the user requires that the auxiliary beam be made from a specified range of depth of wide flange beams, then use that range in depth. These depths are compared to the nominal beam depth given in the DS_CRNBM.siz file under the marker @AUX_BEAM. BEAM DEPTH, MAXIMUM (in, mm) If the user requires that the auxiliary beam be made from a specified range of depth of wide flange beams, then use that range in depth. These depths are compared to the nominal beam depth given in the DS_CRNBM.siz file under the marker @AUX_BEAM. AUXILIARY COLUMN COLUMN TYPE 'N' if there are no additional columns, else the auxiliary column type. The available auxiliary columns are: R - hot rolled wide flange section, W - welded wide flange sections. © 2011 Metal Building Software, Inc


109

COLUMN OPTION FOR FUTURE USE. DEPTH OPTION FOR FUTURE USE. COLUMN DEPTH, MINIMUM (in, mm) If the user requires that the auxiliary column be made from a specified range of depth of wide flange beams, then use that range in depth. These depths are compared to the nominal beam depth given in the DS_CRNBM.siz file under the marker @AUX_COL. COLUMN DEPTH, MAXIMUM (in, mm) If the user requires that the auxiliary column be made from a specified range of depth of wide flange beams, then use that range in depth. These depths are compared to the nominal beam depth given in the DS_CRNBM.siz file under the marker @AUX_COL. ELEVATION For each of the left and right auxiliary columns, use the distance from the finish floor to the column base. Use a negative value if the column base is below the floor. If necessary, in the input files of the programs, you can set unique elevations for each column. 3.3.5.5.3 Crane Systems - Detail

RUNWAY BEAM 'Y' Detail and Cost runway Beams, 'N' Not provided. AUX. BEAM 'Y' Detail and Cost Auxiliary Beams, 'N' Not provided. AUX. COLUMN 'Y' Detail and Cost Auxiliary Columns, 'N' Not provided. STOPS 'Y' Detail and Cost crane Stops, [NOT ACTIVE] 'N' Not provided BRACKET (LEFT/RIGHT) 'Y' Detail and Cost crane Bracket provided, 'N' No bracket provided 3.3.5.5.4 Crane Rail

TYPE Select the crane rail type. 'R' Rail (ASCE or Bethlehem) 'S' Square guide CONN OPT

[NOT ACTIVE]


110


Select the rail connection option to the runway beam. 'H' Hook bolts 'B' Bolted clamps 'R' Rail bolted clips 'P' Pad w/ bolted clips 'S' Stud clamps welded 'W' Weld clips 'F' Field weld attachment DEPTH (in, mm) Specify the crane rail depth. This will allow vertical clearance calculations from the top of rail to underside of rigid frame. DEAD LOAD (lb/ft or kN/m) The weight of the crane rail. 3.3.5.5.5 Crane Deflection Limits

RUNWAY BEAM DEFLECTION (Horiz) The horizontal deflection limit for the runway beam. MBMA suggests for top running cranes with 100% of lateral force as L/400. RUNWAY BEAM DEFLECTION (Vert) The vertical deflection limit for the runway beam. MBMA suggests for top running cranes with service class. A, B, C as L/600 D as L/800 AUXILLARY BEAM DEFLECTION (Vert) The vertical deflection limit for the auxiliary beam. FRAME VERTICAL IMPACT 'Y' to use the crane runway beam reactions (including vertical impact) on the rigid frame, auxiliary columns, auxiliary beams, and endwall columns, 'N' to apply vertical loads to rigid frames, endwall columns, auxiliary beams, and auxiliary columns without the vertical impact factor. MBMA states that the vertical impact factor need only be applied in the design of runway beams. 3.3.5.5.6 Crane Systems - Bracing

Crane bracing is independent of the building longitudinal bracing for wind and seismic. Crane diagonal bracing can be used below the auxiliary beam in the endwall and longitudinally between auxiliary columns. AUXILIARY BEAM Select diagonal bracing type below the auxiliary beam in the endwall. 'N' No bracing 'C' use Cable bracing 'R' use Rod bracing © 2011 Metal Building Software, Inc


111

'A' use Angle bracing LONGITUDINAL Select longitudinal bracing type in between the auxiliary columns. 'N' 'C' 'R' 'A'

No bracing use Cable bracing use Rod bracing use Angle bracing

OPTION FOR FUTURE USE. NUMBER OF BAYS The number of bays in that wall which will have wind framing. Use 0 if the program is to locate the wind framing. BAY ID The bay number for the wind framing. Bays are numbered from left to right looking at the front sidewall.


112

3.3.5 F


Runway Cranes



113

SYSTEM ID Select crane runway system id to define individual cranes. CRANE SPAN (ft, mm) This is filled in with the information used in the Runway Location, Span on the Crane Systems tab. Horizontal distance between left and right rail beams defines the crane bridge span. This entry is for display only. COPY FROM CRANE # The Crane ID # from a previously defined Crane that will be copied to the displayed Crane #. Select the "Copy From" Crane ID # in the dropdown list next to the right of the [Copy From Crane #] button. Select the "Copy To" Crane by clicking the Crane # button (Crane #1 to Crane #5) in the left column. If the button that corresponds to an empty slot for the Crane is not enabled, you must increase the Number of Cranes needed.


114


NUMBER OF INDIVIDUAL CRANES ON RUNWAY SYSTEM The quantity of cranes to be associated with each runway system. MINIMUM CRANE SPACE The minimum crane spacing between multiple cranes per runway system. START (ft, mm) Distance from the left endwall of the building to the start of the leading trolley wheel of the crane on a Longitudinal runway system looking from the front sidewall. Distance from the back sidewall of the building to the start of the leading trolley wheel of the crane on a Transverse runway system looking from the left endwall. END (ft, mm) Distance from the left endwall of the building to the end of the trailing trolley wheel of the crane on a Longitudinal runway system looking from the front sidewall. Distance from the back sidewall of the building to the end of the trailing trolley wheel of the crane on a Transverse runway system looking from the left endwall. CAPACITY (tons, kN) The crane capacity. USE CRANE TABLES 'Y' if the crane table data is to be used, 'N' if no crane table data is to be used The crane table contains default data for the items listed below. If specific crane data is not available from the customer, then the crane table data can be used. The Crane Table file is defined in file DS_CRANE.siz. This file is stored in the default directory for \MBS\SIZ2. When your Span, Capacity, Crane Type, or Bay Spacing is exceeded, then crane weights and wheelbase must be input by the user. Crane rail dead load is not retrieved from the DS_CRANE.siz file since this is now a crane runway system entry. CRANE WEIGHT BRIDGE (Kips, kN) The weight for the bridge. HOIST/TROLLEY (Kips, kN) The combined weight for the hoist and trolley. MAXIMUM WHEEL LOAD (Kips, kN) The maximum wheel load (without impact) if given in crane specifications. The design program will use the wheel load if non-zero, else the wheel load is based on the capacity, bridge, and hoist weights. WHEEL BASE OUT (ft, mm) The distance (as measured in the plane of bridge movement) between the support wheels on the bridge. When four support wheels are on each end of the bridge, use the distance between the outer most wheels on the truck.



115

IN (ft, mm) Distance from the outer wheel to an inner wheel for a 4-wheel truck. If only two support wheels on each end of the bridge, set to 0.00. BRIDGE CRANE POWER The bridge power influences the longitudinal input factor. 'E' for electric power 'H' for hand power, CSA 01 Hot-Rolled 'H' for hand power, All Other Hot-Rolled

(10) (10) (0)

HOIST CRANE POWER The hoist power influences the vertical input factor. If you have a cab-operated bridge, select ‘C’. If no cab, select the power for the hoist as 'E' or 'H'. 'E' 'C' 'H' 'H'

for electric power (pendant operated) for cab operated bridge for hand power, CSA 01 Hot-Rolled for hand power, All Other Hot-Rolled

(10) (25) (5) (0)

TROLLEY CRANE POWER The trolley power influences the lateral input factor. 'E' for electric power 'H' for hand power, CSA 01 Hot-Rolled 'H' for hand power, All Other Hot-Rolled

(20) (10) (0)

BEAM IMPACT (%) LONGITUDINAL The longitudinal impact percentage for the crane runway beam. When changing the crane power, the corresponding impact percentages will change. Default percentages are indicated along with the power options in parenthesis. LATERAL The lateral impact percentage for the crane runway beam. When changing the crane power, the corresponding impact percentages will change. Default percentages are indicated along with the power options in parenthesis. VERTICAL The vertical impact percentage for the crane runway beam. Can also be applied to rigid frames, interior rigid frame columns, auxiliary columns, endwall columns, and auxiliary beams if the Frame vertical impact option = 'Y'. When changing the crane power, the corresponding impact percentages will change. Default percentages are indicated along with the power options in parenthesis.


116


SERVICE CLASS SERVICE CLASS - AISC 05 The crane service classification is based on the load spectrum reflecting the actual service conditions as closely as possible. This is used to assign the number of stress cycles (Design Life = first lift to decommission) for fatigue calculations. Classes E and F can produce severe fatigue conditions. For more information see AISC Design Guide 7, Part 2. A Standby or Infrequent Service - Design life of 20,000 stress cycles. Rated capacity loads mostly for initial installation and long idle periods between lifts. (used in powerhouses, public utilities, turbine rooms, motor rooms and transformer stations) B Light Service - Design life of 50,000 stress cycles. Loads are light and speed is slow (2-5 lifts per hour for about 10') (used in repair shops, light assembly operations, service buildings, light warehousing, etc.) C Moderate Service - Design life of 100,000 stress cycles. Loads are about half rated capacity (5-10 lifts per hour for about 15') (used in machine shops or paper mill machine rooms, etc.) D Heavy Service - Design life of 500,000 stress cycles. Loads approaching half rated capacities handled constantly throughout day (10-20 lifts per hour averaging 15'). Not more than 65% of lifts at rated capacity. (used in heavy machine shops, fabricating plants, steel warehouses, container yards, lumber mills, standard duty bucket and magnet operations) E Severe Service - Design life of 1,500,000 stress cycles. Loads approaching rated capacity (20 or more lifts per hour) (used in magnet/bucket operations, scrap yards, cement mills, lumber mills, fertilizer plants, container handling, etc.) F Continuous Severe Service - Design life greater than 2,000,000 stress cycles. Loads approaching rated capacity continuously. (used in custom specialty cranes for critical work tasks affecting total production facility) A stress cycle, N, can be approximated by multiplying the number of lifts per day times 365 times number of years for design life. LOADING CONDITION - AISC 89 The crane loading condition is used for the AISC 89. This is used to correlate to the number of stress cycles (Design Life equals first lift to decommission) for fatigue calculations. Loading Conditions 3 and 4 can produce severe fatigue conditions. For more information see AISC 89 Appendix K4.2, Table A-K4.1. 1 Moderate Service - Design life of 20,000* - 100,000 stress cycles. *Approximately 2 cycle per day for 25 years Approximately 10 cycles per day for 25 years



117

(used in machine shops, paper mill machine rooms, or for smaller applications) 2 Heavy Service - Design life of 100, 000 - 500,000 stress cycles. Approximately 50 cycles per day for 25 years (used in heavy machine shops, fabricating plants, steel warehouses, container yards, lumber mills, standard duty bucket and magnet operations) 3 Severe Service - Design life of 500,000 -2,000,000 stress cycles. Approximately 200 cycles per day for 25 years (used in magnet/bucket operations, scrap yards, cement mills, lumber mills, fertilizer plants, container handling, etc.) 4 Continuous Severe Service - Design life greater than 2,000,000 stress cycles. Loads approaching rated capacity continuously. (used in custom specialty cranes for critical work tasks affecting total production facility) A stress cycle, N, can be approximated by multiplying the number of lifts per day times 365 times number of years for design life.


118

3.3.5 G


Deflection, Yields

3.3.5.7.1 Deflection Limits

Member deflection limits are reported in terms of the span divided by a value. For example, a 20' bay would give 240 inches / 180 = 1.333 inch maximum deflection, where 180 is the value set. Endwall Columns: wind load Endwall Rafters: live load, wind load Wall Girt: wind load Purlin: live load, wind load Wall Panel: wind load



119

Roof Panel: live load, wind load Rigid Frame: horizontal drift at top of sidewall column, seismic horizontal drift at top of column, crane, vertical displacement at rafter mid-span. Wind Framing: wind loading on wind bent or wind column. Partition Column: Partition Girt: Partition Panel: 3.3.5.7.2 Extension, Deflection Limits

Member deflection limits are reported in terms of the span divided by a constant. Enter the constant to be used for each member and loading. Attachment Beam:

Live Load

Attachment Beam:

Wind Load

Attachment Beam:

Total Load

Attachment Beam Purlin:

Live Load


Wind Load


Total Load

Facia Arm:

Wind Load

Facia Panel:

Wind Load

Facia Girt:

Wind Load

3.3.5.7.3 Steel Yield

The yield strength of the steel to be used in the building. Use the yield strength of the wall and roof panel. Hot rolled refers to R and U members. Cold rolled refers to C Z and D members. Web plate and flange plate refer to the plates in the rigid frames and W columns. 3.3.5.7.4 Stress Ratio

The acceptable upper limit of the ratio of the calculated stress to the allowable stress, which will be used in the design programs. For the CECS 102:02 Design Code, this factor can be used to represent the design lifetime of the building as follows:


120


Lifetime, years Max Stress Ratio

100 0.91

50 1.00

25 1.05

5 1.11

Use the maximum stress ratio corresponding to the building design lifetime.

3.3.6

Walls / Roof

3.3.6 A

Girts



121

COPY GIRTS ID Using the pull-down lists, the user can select girt information for a wall Id number to copy, and then click the Copy button. COPY BUTTON This will fill in all the information from the copied wall Id. Wall Id numbers are available for all walls other than the current wall Id number. After the Copy button is clicked, the user can through each entry and modify the copied information, or for the next wall. GIRT TYPE Click the down arrow to select the desired girt and mount. The first letter is member type where: D = double C, R = hot rolled wide flange,


122


W = welded plate flange, U = hot rolled channel, C = Cee shape, Z = Zee member, and J = joist. For type of mount: B = bypass, F = flush, and O = outside mount with no lap. The CL is a CO with a lap piece attached to each girt and located at the support. USE FLANGE STRAP Check the 'Use' box if the inside flange of the roof purlins are to be braced. This bracing is sometimes called "bridging angles." The maximum spacing of the flange braces is set in the DS_BUILD(roof 5) for fasten through panels and DS_BUILD(roof 6) for standing seam roofs. SUPPLY Check the 'Supply' box if the inside flange braces are to be furnished with the building. OFFSET (in, mm) The outside girt flange can be set inward (offset) from the outside building line. This is available for any wall girt type. PROJECTION (in, mm) The outside girt flange can project beyond the face of the column (projection). This is available for any wall girt type. For flush girts, a value less than the girt depth is expected, and for bypass and outset girts, a value greater than the girt depth is expected. SET DEPTH (in, mm) If the girt depth is to be set by the user, use desired depth, else zero and the program will determine the depth. SET LAP (ft, mm) If the girt lap is to be set by the user, use desired lap, else zero and the program will determine the lap. SET LOCATION N for the program to locate the girts, Y for the user to specify the location of each girt, P (partial) for the user to set some girts and the program to locate the other girts, S for the endwall girts to be at the same location as the sidewall end bay girts at same elevations, B for the endwall girts to be at the same location as the back sidewall girts, F for the endwall girts to be at the same location as the front sidewall girts, and I for interval spacing, where the girt location determines the repeated girt spacing. © 2011 Metal Building Software, Inc


123

NUMBER OF GIRTS The number of girts for which locations will be set on the next line. If zero is used, the program will start by locating the first girt at DS_BUILD(wall 3) and the remaining girts at an equal spacing not to exceed that value. When Set Location is I (interval) and Number of Girts equals 1.0 then the program will space the girts as set by the Girt Location value. When Number of Girts equals 2.0, the first location value will locate the lowest girt and the second location value specifies the girt spacing above the lowest girt. GIRT LOCATION (ft, mm) The distance from the finish floor to the girt web, one value for each girt. If building has a base girt on a specific wall, use the distance above the finish floor to the girt web followed by other girt locations. When Set Location is I (interval), the girt location values are used as defined by the number of girts being 1.0 or 2.0. 3.3.6 B

Purlins


124


3.3.6.2.1 Roof Purlins

PURLIN TYPE Click the down arrow to select the desired purlin and mount. The first letter is member type where: D = double C, R = hot rolled wide flange, W = welded plate flange, U = hot rolled channel, C = Cee shape, Z = Zee member, and J = joist. For type of mount: B = bypass, F = flush, and O = outside mount with no lap. The CL purlin is a CO purlin with a lapped piece at each support point. JF is for an open web steel joist attached to the top of the rafter. FLANGE STRAP Check the 'Use' box if the inside flange of the roof purlins are to be braced. This bracing is sometimes called "bridging angles." The maximum spacing of the flange braces in set in the DS_BUILD(roof 5) for fastening through panels and DS_BUILD(roof 6) for standing seam roofs. SUPPLY Check the 'Supply' box if the inside flange braces are to be furnished with the building. OFFSET (in, mm) The outside purlin flange can be set inward (offset) from the outside building line. This is available for any roof purlin type. PROJECTION (in, mm) The outside purlin flange can project beyond the face of the rafter (projection). This is available for any roof purlin type. For flush purlins a value less than the prulin depth is expected, and for bypass and outset purlins, a value greater than the purlin depth is expected. PEAK SPACING (ft, mm) The distance from the roof surface intersection to the web of the nearest purlin as measured along either the roof surface or the rafter surface depending on DM57. For single slope buildings, set to zero and the program will: (1) use equal spacing for the first and last purlin on the surface when the set purlin spacing option is used, or (2) use equal spacing for all the purlins when the set purlin spacing option is not used.



125

MAX SPACING (ft, mm) The maximum permitted purlin spacing. The program will start with this spacing but may reduce to a smaller value for strength or economy reasons. Spacing is measured along the roof surface. SET SPACE (ft, mm) If the final purlin spacing is to be set by user and not determined by the program, use that spacing. If the program is to determine the spacing, set to zero. SET DEPTH (in, mm) If the user wants to set the purlin depth, use that depth. For the program to determine the purlin depth, set to zero. SET LAP (ft, mm) The lap if it is to be set by the user, else 0 and the program will determine the lap. EAVE STRUT TYPE The 2 letter code for the eave strut type selected. '--' - Eave strut will be as specified in DS_BUILD(roof27) and DS_BUILD(roof67), 'EO' - Eave strut outside mount, 'EF' - Eave Strut Flush mount, 'CO' - Cee shape Outside mount, 'CF' - Cee shape Flush mount, 'ZF' - Zee shape Flush mount, 'ZB' - Zee shape bypass eave strut, 'ZO' - Zee shape outside mount, 'JF' - Joist shape flush mount, 'JO' - Joist shape outside mount, or 'GO' - G-shape outside mount. Note: All eave strut types except '*F' attach to the soldier columns. '*F' eave strut types span between rigid frames and do not attach to soldier columns. 3.3.6.2.2 Set Purlin Spacing

SURF ID The first roof surface id, typically 2, and numbered consecutively through the total number of roof surfaces. COPY ID Using the pull-down list, the user can select a roof surface Id number to copy, and then click the Copy button. COPY BUTTON This will fill in the roof purlin spacing information from the copied roof surface Id. After the Copy button is clicked, the user can modify the information. To reverse the purlin spacing for the surface, select Yes in the confirm dialog box, else select No. SETS OF SPACE The quantity of purlin spaces to be defined. © 2011 Metal Building Software, Inc

126


NUMBER OF SPACE, SPACING (ft, mm) For each spacing, set the spacing and the number of times that spacing occurs. Move from left right along each surface. Do not include the peak space in the spacings that has been set. You can use a spacing of zero and the program will determine the value not to exceed the maximum spacing and to fill the available space. You can also set the number of times that spacing will occur as zero and the roof design program will fill in the value not to exceed the available space. For a single slope building, the peak space is always on the right side, regardless if it is the high side or low side of the frame. Use DS_BUILD(Roof 2) to set the minimum purlin spacing. See PE 11-94-1 for entering variable purlin spacing. ROOF SURFACE LENGTH, (ft, mm) The total sloped distance for the surface Id selected as measured along the panel. REMAINING LENGTH ALONG ROOF LINE, (ft, mm) Length of surface remaining after all non-zero entries. The value is continually updated as spacings are defined. The peak space is considered in the remainder length is applied along the roof line. If DM57 = ‘Y', this distance is still applied along the roof line, since the purlin depth is may not be known, and it is suggested to have at least one entry with a space of 0.00. Rigid frame drawing purlin space dimensioning is according to DM199 should be consistent with DM57.



3.3.6 C

Endwall Framing, Panels


127

128


3.3.6.3.1 Endw all Framing

COPY BUTTON The information can be entered for the Left or Right Endwall, and then the Copy button can be selected for the information to fill in the remaining endwall. COLUMN TYPE The available endwall columns are: C - cold formed C sections, D - double cold formed C sections, R - hot rolled wide flange section, W - welded wide flange sections, or U - hot rolled channel sections (U). The user can select a single member type by entering a single letter, like 'C' or the user can select a first choice type and if the program determines that the first choice is not available in the required strength or stiffness the program will go on to the second choice in member © 2011 Metal Building Software, Inc


129

type. First and second choice members are indicated by the order in which the data is entered, that is 'CW' indicates, use the C section if adequate, else use the welded section. Up to four member types can be in the selection process, such as 'CDRW'. If the endwall has columns that are also used as door jambs and you want, for example, 'R' endwall columns except for those columns that are also door jambs. Then, you can call for column selection of 'RC' or 'RU'. However, you also have to place a file marker in the DS_RCOL.siz file. The file marker is '@JAMB' and is placed as the last member in the file. COLUMN DEPTH (in, mm) The desired depth for the columns. If the program is to determine the column depth, use 0. COLUMN ROTATION The default corner column orientation is for the column web to be parallel with the plane of the sidewall. If you want the column web to be parallel with the endwall, use "Rotate Column 90 degrees". RAFTER TYPE The available endwall rafters are: C - cold formed C sections, D - double cold formed C sections, R - hot rolled wide flange section, W - welded wide flange sections, or U - hot rolled channel sections (U). The user can select a single member type by entering a single letter, like 'C' or the user can select a first choice type and if the program determines that the first choice is not available in the required strength or stiffness the program will go on to the second choice in member type. First and second choice members are indicated by the order in which the data is entered, that is 'CW' indicates, use the C section if adequate, else use the welded section. Up to four member types can be in the selection process, such as 'CDRW'. RAFTER DEPTH (in, mm) The desired depth for the rafter. If the program is to determine the rafter depth, use 0. SPLICE TYPE Use either 'S', 'S2, 'S3', 'S5', or 'S7' for a shear splice or 'M' or 'F' for moment splices. The splices are described as follows: 'S' = bolted web plate on one side of member web (PE10, PE18), 'S2' = bolted web plate on both sides of member and bolted to web of adjacent member ( PS25, PS34), 'S3' = end plate welded to member, bolts in end plate used to transfer shear force (PE59, PE68), 'S5' = bolted web plate on both sides of member web (PE69), 'S7' = rafter web bolts to column inside flange for a C U rafter, or to welded bracket for R W rafter (PE73), 'M' = end plate welded to member, a pair of bolts on each side of each flange to transfer moment (PE11, PE12, PE42), and 'F' = end plate welded to member, a pair of bolts just inside each flange to transfer moment (PE41, PE42). This is for the rafter splice at the building peak or roof surface intersections. Splice type along © 2011 Metal Building Software, Inc

130


the rafter is set by DS_BUILD(ew12). However, if DS_BUILD(ew12) is set to 10, this splice type entry at the building peak will also apply to the splices along the rafter. 3.3.6.3.2 Panels

PANEL TYPE The symbol used in the panel file to identify the selected panel. Choices come from the DS_PANEL.siz file. SCREW LENGTH Use S, M, or L for the screw length as small, medium, or long. SCREW FINISH This is a two character field, where the two characters are for the screw finish as defined in the DT_SCRW1.siz file. Finish entries must also be set in the DT_COLOR.siz file to be available in the pull-down list. 3.3.6.3.3 Insulation

INSULATION, TYPE One of the insulation types that is available in the DT_INSUL.siz file. INSULATION, THICK The insulation thickness from the available list. The thickness must match with that available in the DT_INSUL.siz file. INSULATION, WIRE Use Y if the insulation wire is to be supplied, S for insulation strapping, or N for none. STANDING SEAM Select one of the available choices. The types available are: FL for floating and FX for fixed. The length available per type is the clip height in inches or millimeters.



3.3.6 D

Wainscot


131

132


3.3.6.4.1 Layout

COPY ID Using the pull-down lists, the user can select a wainscot Id number to copy, and then click the Copy button. COPY BUTTON This will fill in all the wainscot information for the currently selected wainscot item from the copied wainscot Id. It is presumed that one of the items will be modified to make this entry unique from the copied wainscot Id. After the Copy button is clicked, the user can through each entry and modify the copied information to make the item unique from the copied wainscot. NUMBER The total number of wainscot's used for the building.



133

WAINSCOT ID Starting with 1 as the first wainscot defined, and numbered consecutively through the total number of openings. The program automatically assigns this number. WALL ID The id representing the wall where the wainscot is being used. 1 - Left endwall 2 - Front sidewall 3 - Right endwall 4 - Back sidewall BAY ID, START Bay number at which the wainscot starts. Bays are numbered from left to right along the wall, as you view the wall from outside of the building. BAY ID, END Bay number at which the wainscot ends. Bays are numbered from left to right along the wall, as you view the wall from outside of the building. HEIGHT (ft, mm) Use to set the height of the wainscot panel on the wall. A value of 0 will indicate a full height panel (panel is as high as the highest surface point) for the defined area of a wainscot item.


134


3.3.6.4.2 Framing Type

BASE Used to choose the type of framing member to attach the wainscot panel for the bottom of the wainscot on the wall. - - None A - Base Angle B - Base channel TOP Used to specify the type of framing member for where the wainscot panel meets the wall panel. - - None C - Cee © 2011 Metal Building Software, Inc


135

D - Double Cee U - Rolled Channel Z - Zee 3.3.6.4.3 Panels

PANEL Used to choose the panel for the wainscot panel on the wall. Panel is specified in the DS_PANEL.siz file; the @WAIN marker can be used to specify panels for wainscot only. Note: If panel is defined as '-------- - None' then no girts will be added below the wainscot height. PANEL COLOR Used to choose the color of the panel for wainscot on the wall. Color is specified in the DT_COLOR.siz file using '--' as the type. PANEL STYLE Used to choose a unique profile or type of panel for the wainscot on the wall. Style is specified in the DT_COLOR.siz file using 'ST' as the type. PANEL OPTION Used to choose what to do with the panel splice where the wainscot panel meets the wall panel: 'B' - Break the wainscot at the wall panel, do not lap the panels 'L' - Lap the wall panel over the wainscot panel. 'N' - Break the wall panel at the wainscot, girt designed with no flange bracing (unbraced) [NOT ACTIVE] © 2011 Metal Building Software, Inc

136


SCREW LENGTH Used to choose the length of the screws for the wainscot panels. S - Short length M - Medium length L - Long length SCREW FINISH Used to choose the screw finish for consideration when selecting screws from the DT_SCRW1.siz file. Finish is specified in the DT_COLOR.siz file using 'FN' as the type. 3.3.6.4.4 Trim

COLOR BASE Used to choose the color of the trim for the bottom of the wainscot on the wall. Color is specified in the DT_COLOR.siz file using '--' as the type. LEFT END Used to choose the color of the trim for the left and right ends of the wainscot on the wall. This is used when the wainscot does and does not start or end at the corners of the building. When a wainscot starts and ends at the corner of the building with an adjacent wainscot, both wainscots must have the same color. Color is specified in the DT_COLOR .siz file using '--' as the type. RIGHT END Used to choose the color of the trim for the left and right ends of the wainscot on the wall. This is used when the wainscot does and does not start or end at the corners of the building. When a wainscot starts and ends at the corner of the building with an adjacent © 2011 Metal Building Software, Inc


137

wainscot, both wainscots must have the same color. Color is specified in the DT_COLOR .siz file using '--' as the type. TOP Used to choose the color of the trim for the top of the wainscot on the wall. Color is specified in the DT_COLOR.siz file using '--' as the type. JAMB Used to choose the color of the trim for the jamb and header of a framed opening in the wainscot are on the wall. Color is specified in the DT_COLOR.siz file using '--' as the type. STYLE BASE Used to choose a unique profile or type of trim for the bottom of the wainscot on the wall. Style is specified in the DT_COLOR.siz file using 'ST' as the type. LEFT END Used to choose a unique profile or type of trim for the left and right ends of the wainscot on the wall. This is used when the wainscot does and does not start or end at the corners of the building. When a wainscot starts and ends at the corner of the building with an adjacent wainscot, both wainscots must have the same style. Style is specified in the DT_COLOR.siz file using 'ST' as the type. RIGHT END Used to choose a unique profile or type of trim for the left and right ends of the wainscot on the wall. This is used when the wainscot does and does not start or end at the corners of the building. When a wainscot starts and ends at the corner of the building with an adjacent wainscot, both wainscots must have the same style. Style is specified in the DT_COLOR.siz file using 'ST' as the type. TOP Used to choose a unique profile or type of trim for the top of the wainscot on the wall. Style is specified in the DT_COLOR.siz file using 'ST' as the type. JAMB Used to choose a unique profile or type of trim for the jamb and header of a framed opening in the wainscot area on the wall. Style is specified in the DT_COLOR.siz file using 'ST' as the type.


138

3.3.6 E


Wind Framing



139

3.3.6.5.1 Wall - Left and Right

COPY WIND FRAMING WALL ID All wall Id numbers are available to other pull-down lists. Using the pull-down list, the user can select bracing information for a wall Id number to copy, and then click the Copy button. COPY BUTTON This will fill in the Panel Shear Use, Diagonal Bracing Type, Wind Bent Use, Wind Column Use, RF Weak Axis Bending Use. The program will jump to the # Diagonal Bracing Number of Bays for the next input item. The quantity of bays and bay Id numbers are not copied for any of the bracing types. When endwall bracing is copied from a sidewall, the wind bent, wind column, and RF weak axis bending is not used. PANEL SHEAR, USE Use Y for each framing to be used, else N. On a given wall the user may set to Y for all options. The program will then use these priorities: © 2011 Metal Building Software, Inc

140


(1) panel shear, (2) diagonal bracing, (3) weak axis bending providing the sidewall column flanges do not exceed a specified value, and (4) either wind bent or wind column, whichever has the least weight. The sequence of priorities selected is active only when a bay or bays of bracing are NOT specified for a brace element. When bays of bracing are specified the program will use only that brace element for design. For each option that the user does not want the program to consider, set to N. DIAGONAL BRACING - TYPE The following entries may be used to specify the use and type of diagonal bracing. Types made up of C, R, and A are not displayed in the pull down list if not found in the DS_CABLE. siz file. 'N' 'Y'

= No bracing. = Use bracing of the type set by DM27.

'C' 'R' 'A' 'A2'

= Use cable bracing. = Use rod bracing. = Use angle bracing. = Use two angles, or double angles. They have twice the capacity of a single angle in tension. 'C2' = Use two sets of cable bracing side by side in the same bay. 'R2' = Use two sets of rod bracing side by side in the same bay. (C2 and R2 options require the items be included in the DS_CABLE file). Sidewall Only: 'TE' = Use torsional bracing, torsion force carried by endwalls. See PE 7-00-13. 'TF' = Use torsional bracing, torsion force carried by adjacent rigid frames. See 7-00-13, rev 6-21-02. Endwall Only: 'CF' = Use cable bracing system to transfer endwall shear forces to adjacent rigid frames. See 4-03-3. 'RF' = Use rod bracing system to transfer endwall shear forces to adjacent rigid frames. See 4-03-3. DIAGONAL BRACING - NUMBER OF BAYS The number of bays in that wall which will have wind framing. Use 0 if the program is to locate the wind framing. DIAGONAL BRACING - BAY ID The bay number for the wind framing. Bays are numbered from left to right along the wall. NOTE Should the Wind Bent or Wind Column be the required bracing system then they will be used in the bays specified. BRACE OPTION



141

The following options are available to define the bracing configuration in the braced bay. The Diagonal Brace Type must be other than N. XX - Tiered X-bracing XB - Wind bent with X-bracing BRACE HEIGHT The height elevation from finish floor to the first tier diagonal bracing attachment location (XX) or the top of wind bent (XB) based on the brace option selection. This must be a value greater than 0.00. 3.3.6.5.2 Wall - Front and Back

COPY WIND FRAMING WALL ID All wall Id numbers are available to other pull-down lists. Using the pull-down list, the user can select bracing information for a wall Id number to copy, and then click the Copy button. COPY BUTTON This will fill in the Panel Shear Use, Diagonal Bracing Type, Wind Bent Use, Wind Column Use, RF Weak Axis Bending Use. The program will jump to the # Diagonal Bracing Number of Bays for the next input item. The quantity of bays and bay Id numbers are not copied for any of the bracing types. When endwall bracing is copied from a sidewall, the wind bent, wind column, and RF weak axis bending is not used. PANEL SHEAR, USE Use Y for each framing to be used, else N. On a given wall the user may set to Y for all options. The program will then use these priorities: (1) panel shear, (2) diagonal bracing, (3) weak axis bending providing the sidewall column flanges do not exceed a specified value, and (4) either wind bent or wind column, whichever has the least weight. The sequence of priorities selected is active only when a bay or bays of bracing are NOT specified for a brace element. When bays of bracing are specified the program will use only that brace element for design. For each option that the user does not want the program to consider, set to N. DIAGONAL BRACING - TYPE The following entries may be used to specify the use and type of diagonal bracing. Types made up of C, R, and A are not displayed in the pull down list if not found in the DS_CABLE. siz file. 'N' 'Y'


'C' 'R' 'A' 'A2'

= Use cable bracing. = Use rod bracing. = Use angle bracing. = Use two angles, or double angles. They have twice the capacity of a single angle in tension. 'C2' = Use two sets of cable bracing side by side in the same bay. © 2011 Metal Building Software, Inc

142


'R2' = Use two sets of rod bracing side by side in the same bay. (C2 and R2 options require the items be included in the DS_CABLE file). Sidewall Only: 'TE' = Use torsional bracing, torsion force carried by endwalls. See PE 7-00-13. 'TF' = Use torsional bracing, torsion force carried by adjacent rigid frames. See 7-00-13, rev 6-21-02. Endwall Only: 'CF' = Use cable bracing system to transfer endwall shear forces to adjacent rigid frames. See 4-03-3. 'RF' = Use rod bracing system to transfer endwall shear forces to adjacent rigid frames. See 4-03-3. DIAGONAL BRACING - NUMBER OF BAYS The number of bays in that wall which will have wind framing. Use 0 if the program is to locate the wind framing. DIAGONAL BRACING - BAY ID The bay number for the wind framing. Bays are numbered from left to right along the wall. NOTE Should the Wind Bent or Wind Column be the required bracing system then they will be used in the bays specified. BRACE OPTION The following options are available to define the bracing configuration in the braced bay. The Diagonal Brace Type must be other than N. XX - Tiered X-bracing XB - Wind bent with X-bracing BRACE HEIGHT The height elevation from finish floor to the first tier diagonal bracing attachment location (XX) or the top of wind bent (XB) based on the brace option selection. This must be a value greater than 0.00. WIND BENT - TYPE The following entries may be used to specify the type of wind bent. N - No wind bent Y - Use member type set by DS_BUILD(wall11) R - Use Hot Rolled W - Use Welded Plate S - Use Special (Tapered Columns) WIND BENT - NUMBER OF BAYS The number of bays in that wall which will have wind framing. Use 0 if the program is to locate the wind framing. WIND BENT - BAY ID



143

The bay number for the wind framing. Bays are numbered from left to right along the wall. WIND COLUMN, USE Use Y for each framing to be used, else N. On a given wall the user may set to Y for all options. The program will then use these priorities: (1) panel shear, (2) diagonal bracing, (3) weak axis bending providing the sidewall column flanges do not exceed a specified value, and (4) either wind bent or wind column, whichever has the least weight. For each option that the user does not want the program to consider, set to N. WIND COLUMN - NUMBER OF BAYS The number of bays in that wall which will have wind framing. Use 0 if the program is to locate the wind framing. WIND COLUMN - BAY ID The bay number for the wind framing. Bays are numbered from left to right along the wall. WIND COLUMN - SIDE Use L or R to indicate if the wind column is on the left or right side of the bay. RIGID FRAME WEAK AXIS BENDING Use Y for each framing to be used, else N. On a given wall the user may set to Y for all options. The program will then use these priorities: (1) panel shear, (2) diagonal bracing, (3) weak axis bending providing the sidewall column flanges do not exceed a specified value, and (4) either wind bent or wind column, whichever has the least weight. For each option that the user does not want the program to consider, set to N. 3.3.6.5.3 Interior Column

DIAGONAL BRACING - TYPE The following entries may be used to specify the use and type of diagonal bracing. Types made up of C, R, and A are not displayed in the pull down list if not found in the DS_CABLE. siz file. 'N' 'Y'


'C' 'R' 'A' 'A2'

= Use cable bracing. = Use rod bracing. = Use angle bracing. = Use two angles, or double angles. They have twice the capacity of a single angle in tension. 'C2' = Use two sets of cable bracing side by side in the same bay. 'R2' = Use two sets of rod bracing side by side in the same bay. (C2 and R2 options require the items be included in the DS_CABLE file). © 2011 Metal Building Software, Inc

144


Sidewall Only: 'TE' = Use torsional bracing, torsion force carried by endwalls. See PE 7-00-13. 'TF' = Use torsional bracing, torsion force carried by adjacent rigid frames. See 7-00-13, rev 6-21-02. Endwall Only: 'CF' = Use cable bracing system to transfer endwall shear forces to adjacent rigid frames. See 4-03-3. 'RF' = Use rod bracing system to transfer endwall shear forces to adjacent rigid frames. See 4-03-3. BRACE OPTION The following options are available to define the bracing configuration in the braced bay. The Diagonal Brace Type must be other than N. XX - Tiered X-bracing XB - Wind bent with X-bracing BRACE HEIGHT The height elevation from finish floor to the first tier diagonal bracing attachment location (XX) or the top of wind bent (XB) based on the brace option selection. This must be a value greater than 0.00. WIND COLUMN - OPTION Use Y for each framing to be used, else N. On a given wall the user may set to Y for all options. The program will then use these priorities: (1) panel shear, (2) diagonal bracing, (3) weak axis bending providing the sidewall column flanges do not exceed a specified value, and (4) either wind bent or wind column, whichever has the least weight. For each option that the user does not want the program to consider, set to N. 3.3.6.5.4 Roof

PANEL SHEAR, USE Use Y for each framing to be used, else N. On a given wall the user may set to Y for all options. The program will then use these priorities: (1) panel shear, (2) diagonal bracing, (3) weak axis bending providing the sidewall column flanges do not exceed a specified value, and (4) either wind bent or wind column, whichever has the least weight. The sequence of priorities selected is active only when a bay or bays of bracing are NOT specified for a brace element. When bays of bracing are specified the program will use only that brace element for design. For each option that the user does not want the program to consider, set to N. DIAGONAL BRACING - TYPE The following entries may be used to specify the use and type of diagonal bracing. Types © 2011 Metal Building Software, Inc


145

made up of C, R, and A are not displayed in the pull down list if not found in the DS_CABLE. siz file. 'N' 'Y'


'C' 'R' 'A' 'A2'

= Use cable bracing. = Use rod bracing. = Use angle bracing. = Use two angles, or double angles. They have twice the capacity of a single angle in tension. 'C2' = Use two sets of cable bracing side by side in the same bay. 'R2' = Use two sets of rod bracing side by side in the same bay. (C2 and R2 options require the items be included in the DS_CABLE file). Sidewall Only: 'TE' = Use torsional bracing, torsion force carried by endwalls. See PE 7-00-13. 'TF' = Use torsional bracing, torsion force carried by adjacent rigid frames. See 7-00-13, rev 6-21-02. Endwall Only: 'CF' = Use cable bracing system to transfer endwall shear forces to adjacent rigid frames. See 4-03-3. 'RF' = Use rod bracing system to transfer endwall shear forces to adjacent rigid frames. See 4-03-3. DIAGONAL BRACING - NUMBER OF BAYS The number of bays in that wall which will have wind framing. Use 0 if the program is to locate the wind framing. DIAGONAL BRACING - BAY ID The bay number for the wind framing. Bays are numbered from left to right along the wall. NOTE Should the Wind Bent or Wind Column be the required bracing system then they will be used in the bays specified.


146

3.3.6 F


Soldier Column



147

COPY BUTTON The information can be entered for the Front or Back Sidewall, and then the Copy button can be selected for the information to fill in the remaining sidewall. COLUMN TYPE The available soldier columns are: R - hot-rolled wide flange section or W - welded wide flange sections. The user can select a member type by using the pull-down list box. COLUMN DEPTH (in, mm) The desired depth for the columns. If the program is to determine the column depth, use 0. COLUMN OPTION Use '-' as this is for future use.


148


RAFTER TYPE Use the same criteria in selecting rafter type as was used in selecting column type. RAFTER DEPTH (in, mm) The desired depth for the rafter. If the program is to determine the rafter depth, use 0. RAFTER OPTION Use '4' for soldier rafters that are continuous span between rigid frames and top of soldier columns bolt to the rafter web. '5' for soldier rafters that are continuous span between rigid frames and inside flange of soldier columns bolt to the rafter flange. '6' for soldier rafters that are supported by the purlins and inside flange of soldier columns bolt to the rafter end. BRACE TYPE For diagonal bracing, use 'C' or 'R' to specify the type of bracing as Cable or Rod. BRACE LOCATION The horizontal distance to the bracing from the sidewall. The nearest purlin to the location specified will be the end of the rafter and high side location for the bracing.



3.3.6 G

Design/Detail

3.3.6.7.1 Design/Detail Options

Respond to the following detail/design options for each wall. USE TRIM Check if trim is to be used with building. USE WALL Check this to respond to the above three items with a single check. Endwall

Additional feature Design: Check to design columns and rafters Detail: Check to detail columns and rafters

Sidewall

Additional feature


149

150


Design: Check to design columns with lateral bracing. NOTE:

Parts cannot be detailed if not designed.

USE GIRTS Design: Check for design of girts. Detail: Check for detailing of girts. USE PANELS Design: Check for design of panels (By not checking the use here, this will consider the wall open). Detail: Check for detailing of panels USE WIND FRAME Design: Check from design of wind framing. Detail: Check from detailing of wind framing. 3.3.6.7.2 Roof Detail Options

USE ROOF Check this to respond to the three items below with a single check. NOTE: Parts cannot be detailed if not designed. USE PURLINS Design: Check for design of purlins Detail: Check for detailing of purlins USE PANELS Design: Check for design of panel Detail: Check for detailing of panel USE WIND FRAME Design: Check for design of wind framing Detail: Check for detailing of wind framing 3.3.6.7.3 Base Detail Options

USE ANGLE Use 'N' if the bridging angles are not to be included in the BOM, else 'Y'. BASE CHANNEL Use 'Y' to have a base channel around the perimeter of the building. The channel selected will match the depth of the wall girt. Program uses the channel sections on line 30 to 35 in the DT_ANGLE.siz file. BASE SEAL Use 'Y' if the base seal (base trim) is to be included. The base seal can be used with both the base angle and the base channel. Program uses the member in line 6 of the DT_ANGLE.siz file. BASE ANGLE/SEAL © 2011 Metal Building Software, Inc


151

Use 'Y' to use a special angle that serves as both the base angle and the base seal, or to use the Delux Base Angle. Program uses the member in line 5 of the DT_ANGLE.siz file. When this option is used, the above options do not apply and should be unchecked (= 'N').

3.3.7

Openings


152

3.3.7 A


Framed Openings

Click on the label for the desired wall. Click on and enter the number of openings for the wall. Click on the open space and the data will have zero or blank entries. Double click on the first line of data and the edit box will appear. Complete the edit box and click on the Ok button. Repeat with the next data line or wall. To view the framed openings that have been entered for a specific wall, click on the wall label. COPY FRAMED OPENINGS - WALL Using the pull-down lists, the user can select framed opening information for a wall Id number to copy, and then click the Copy button. COPY BUTTON This will fill in all the frame opening information from the copied wall Id. Wall Id numbers are © 2011 Metal Building Software, Inc


153

available for all walls other than the current wall Id number. After the Copy button is clicked, the user can through each entry and modify the copied information, or for the next wall. All openings along each wall should be reviewed so that the section check is performed for each opening, because copied framed openings may not fit within the current wall. NO OF OPENINGS The number of framed openings on that wall (0 to 40). No more than eight framed openings are permitted in each bay. The number of framed openings that can cut wall girts is limited to two.

BAY ID The number of the bay which contains the framed opening. Bay 1 is at the left end of the wall when viewed from outside the wall. OPEN WIDTH (ft, mm) The width of the framed opening, face of jamb to face of jamb. All framed openings must be contained within the width of the bay except the strip window may extend into many bays. HEADER HEIGHT (ft, mm) The height of the opening. Distance from finish floor to face of door header. OPEN OFFSET (ft, mm) The distance from the left side of the bay to the nearest side of the framed opening. DOOR TYPE The first letter of this two letter code is the door type and the second letter is the framed opening type. If the first digit is blank then the door type is not considered.


154


DIGIT (blank) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

DOOR TYPE Door type is not used. Walk door Self flashing window Standard flashing window Overhead door Inside mount roll-up door Outside mount roll-up door Louvers Overhead door blocking Inside mount roll-up door blocking Outside mount roll-up door blocking Window blocking Center sliding door Right sliding door Left sliding door Window blocking with diagonal rods

OPENING TYPE The first letter of this two-letter code is the door type and the second letter is the framed opening type. If the first digit is blank then the door type is not considered.



DIGIT 0 1 2 3

4 5

6

7

155

OPENING TYPE Opening with no framing members used. Door jamb extends to the level of the next highest girt. Door jamb extends to the eave strut or the endwall rafter. A window where the door jamb extends from one girt to another girt, or to the eave strut. The window jamb does not start at the floor. The window jamb may cut a wall girt. This is for a completely open bay. That is, there will be no wall girts, panels, or jambs. The top of jambs extends to an 'added girt' at a height above the header as specified by DS_BUILD(Wall20) Strip window, that is a window that starts in one bay and extends into one or many bays. No headers or sills provided. Program places a C girt at the opening elevation and at the sill elevation. NOT available with Partitions. Opening between wall girts, no wall girts are cut. See PE 7-01-9.

SILL HEIGHT (ft, mm) The distance from finish floor to the top face of the window sill. BASE ELEVATION (in, mm) The distance from finish floor to the bottom of the jamb base plate. A positive elevation is above finish floor. REMOVE PANELS Use Y to remove panels, trim, and base angle at framed opening, F for a field located framed opening with no deduction for wall panels, trim, and base angle, N for sheeting to remain but remove trim and base angle, or G for sheeting, trim and base angle to remain, provide girts within framed opening if required.


156

3.3.7 B


Wide Doors



157

3.3.7.2.1 Opening Layout

NUMBER OF WIDE DOORS The total number of openings used for the building. Multiple openings are possible provided that the openings are separated by at least one bay. They cannot share the same jamb. COPY ID Using the pull-down lists, the user can select an opening Id number to copy, and then click the Copy button. COPY BUTTON This will fill in all the opening information from the copied opening Id. It is presumed that one of the items will be modified to make this entry unique from the copied opening Id. After the Copy button is clicked, the user can through each entry and modify the copied information to make the item unique from the copied opening.


158


DOOR ID Starting with 1 as the first opening defined, and numbered consecutively through the total number of openings. The program automatically assigns this number. WALL ID The number or select from the pull-down list the id representing the wall for the opening. 1 = Left endwall 3 = Right endwall BAY ID, START Bay number at which the opening starts. Bays are numbered from the left to right along the wall, as you view the wall from outside of the building. The first and last bay of the building cannot be used. When more than one opening is used in the wall there must be at least one bay in between the openings. NOTE: Stub column locations are defined as bays in the endwall bay spacing screen. BAY ID, END Bay number at which the opening ends. Bays are numbered from the left to right along the wall, as you view the wall from outside of the building. The first and last bay of the building cannot be used. When more than one opening is used in the wall there must be at least one bay in between the openings. NOTE: Stub column locations are defined as bays in the endwall bay spacing screen. CLEAR OPENING, WIDTH (ft, mm) The clear width for the opening. The width for the opening cannot be greater than the sum of the bays - 6" (152 mm) and not be less than the sum of the bays - 12" (305mm). CLEAR OPENING, HEIGHT (ft, mm) The clear height of the opening from the floor. The height for the opening cannot be greater than the lowest bay height - 18" (457 mm) and not less than 6' (1829 mm). WEDGE HEIGHT (ft, mm) The height of the door wedge when the door is in the open position from the bottom of the door to the top of the hinge. The height of the wedge cannot be less than 10" (254 mm) and no greater than the lowest bay height - clear open height - 18" (457 mm). STUB ELEVATION (ft, mm) Distance from the floor to the base of the stub column. The elevation of the stub column can not be greater than the clear open height + wedge height - 6" (152 mm) and not less than the clear opening height. NOTE: When a header beam is used, the stub elevation is the distance from the floor to the web of the header beam. TOTAL DOOR WEIGHT (lb, kg) The total weight of the door; this is to be the sum of the framing, panels, etc. The weight of the door cannot be less than 3 lbs/sq. ft. (15 kg/m2 ) and no greater than 26 lbs/sq. ft. (127 kg/ m2 ). This is calculated by taking the door weight and dividing by the sum of the panel lengths. © 2011 Metal Building Software, Inc


159

3.3.7.2.2 Opening Framing

JAMB TYPE Select the jamb columns type by either using the letter or selecting the type by using the pulldown list. R - Hot rolled section W - Built up sections JAMB FLANGE, WIDTH (in, mm) The minimum flange width to be used in selecting a member. The flange width cannot be less than 6" (150 mm) or greater than 12" (305 mm). JAMB FLANGE, THICK (in, mm) The minimum flange thickness to be used in selecting a member. The flange thickness cannot be less than 0.1875" (5 mm) or greater than 1.75" (44 mm). STUB COLUMN TYPE Select the stub columns type (support member not extending to the floor) by either using the letter or selecting the type by using the pull-down list. R - Hot rolled section W - Built up sections HEADER TYPE Select the header type (used along the top of the opening to attach the bottom of the wall panel) by either using the letter or selecting the type by using the pull-down list. Z - Zee C - Cee D - Double cee R - Hot rolled W - Built up DEFLECTION, HORIZONTAL (in, mm) The allowable horizontal deflection for the header. The deflection cannot be less than 0.5" (13 mm) or greater than 4" (102 mm). DEFLECTION, VERTICAL (in, mm) The allowable vertical deflection for the header. The deflection cannot be less than 0.5" (13 mm) or greater than 4" (102 mm). 3.3.7.2.3 Strut Framing

BACK BRACE LOCATION The location the back brace is attached to for supporting the stub columns. R - Roof Strut: Back brace to attach to a point on a roof strut in the bay. F - Rigid frame: Back brace to extend to the next rigid frame line. BACK BRACE TYPE A - Angle* B - Back-to-Back angle* C - Cee D - Double cee © 2011 Metal Building Software, Inc

160


R - Hot rolled W - Built up P - Pipe T - Tube U - Hot-Rolled Channel The B angle is a back-to-back angle with a possible gap between the angles. The gap is set with DT_BUILD(tdd). The user can select a single member type by using a single letter, like 'C' or the user can select a first choice type. If the program determines that the first choice is not available in the required strength or stiffness, the program will go on to the second choice in member type. First and second choice members are indicated by the order in which the data is set, that is 'CW' indicates, use the C section if adequate else use the Welded section. Up to four member types can be in the section process, such as 'CDRW'. ROOF STRUT TYPE/LOCATION Select the roof strut type (used to attach the back brace to at a point between the two rigid frames) by either using the two-letter code or selecting by using the pull-down list. ZB - Zee type member attached to the top of the rafter. CB - Cee type member attached to the top of the rafter. DB - Double cee member attached to the top of the rafter. WB - Built up member attached to the top of the rafter. WF - Built up member attached between the web of the rafters. RB - Hot rolled member attached to the top of the rafter. RF - Hot rolled member attached between the web of the rafters. UB - Rolled channel member attached to the top of the rafter. HEADER BEAM TYPE Select the header beam type by either using the two-letter code or selecting by using the pulldown list. This member helps to stabilize the base of the stub columns. When used the program will only provide back braces at the points where the header beams ends attach to the stub column. -- - No member is used. Z - Zee member to be used attached at the base of the stub column. C - Cee member to be used attached at the base of the stub column. D - Double cee member to be used attached at the base of the stub column. U - Rolled channel member to be used attached at the base of the stub column. R - Hot rolled member to be used attached at the base of the stub column. W - Built up member to be used attached at the base of the stub column. MAXIMUM LENGTH (in, mm) Maximum length the header beam can span. The maximum length for the header beam can not be less than the largest bay width for the opening or greater than the building width. 3.3.7.2.4 Opening Insulation

INSULATION, TYPE Select the insulation type to be used for the opening from the pull-down list; referenced from the DT_INSUL.siz file.



161

INSULATION, THICK (in, mm) Thickness of the insulation selected in the insulation type; referenced from the DT_INSUL. siz file. INSULATION, WIRE Use Y if the insulation wire is to be supplied, S for insulation strapping, or N for none. 3.3.7.2.5 Opening Panels

PANEL Select from the pull-down list or use the panel id used for covering the opening; referenced from the DS_PANEL.siz file. PANEL COLOR Select from the pull-down list or use the two-character code from the available entries listed in the DT_COLOR.siz file. TOP LENGTH The length of the panels for the top half of the opening. If using a single panel to cover the opening then use zero here and use the full panel length as the bottom panel length. The sum of the top and bottom panels cannot be less than the clear opening height or greater than the clear open height + wedge height. BOTTOM LENGTH The length of the panels for the bottom half of the opening. The sum of the top and bottom panels cannot be less than the clear opening height or greater than the clear open height + wedge height. TRIM COLOR A two-character designation for each color. The color choices and the two character codes are in the pull-down list; referenced from the DT_COLOR.siz file. TRIM STYLE Select the trim style to use for the panels on to cover the opening; referenced from the DT_COLOR.siz file. SCREW LENGTH Use S, M, or L for the screw length as small, medium, or long. SCREW FINISH This is a two character field, where the two characters are for the screw finish as defined in the DT_SCRW1.siz file. Finish entries also need to be in the DT_COLOR.siz file to be available in the pull-down list. 3.3.7 C

Wide EW Openings


162


3.3.7.3.1 Layout

For Future Use 3.3.7.3.2 Opening Framing

For Future Use 3.3.7.3.3 Strut Framing

For Future Use



3.3.7 D

Partial Walls


163

164


Click on wall label. Enter sets of bays. Enter base type and full load. Click on start bay/end bay. Edit line appears, complete edit line and click on Ok. Repeat for other walls. COPY PARTIAL WALLS - ID Using the pull-down lists, the user can select partial wall information for a wall Id number to copy, and then click the Copy button. COPY BUTTON This will fill in all the partial wall information from the copied wall Id. Wall Id numbers are available for all walls other than the current wall Id number. After the Copy button is clicked, the user can through each entry and modify the copied information, or for



165

the next wall. Partial walls along each wall should be reviewed so that the section check is performed for each wall, because copied partial walls may not fit within the current wall. SETS OF BAYS The number of sets of bays which are necessary to describe the partial wall. BASE TYPE The item on which the base of the wall panels will be attached. 'C' for cee section, 'D' for double cee section, 'Z' for zee section, 'R' for hot-rolled I-beam section, 'W' for built-up plate I-beam section, 'U' for hot-rolled channel section, 'A' for base angle, or 'S' for special angle section (not detailed). FULL LOAD, GIRT If the girt at the base of the partial wall is to carry its share of the added wind load that accumulates on the wall below the partial wall, use 'Y' else 'N'. FULL LOAD, COLUMN If the wind load on the wall below the start of the partial wall is to be transferred to the adjacent columns, use 'Y', else 'N'. BAY ID - START The start bay for that part of the partial wall which is at a constant height. BAY ID - END The end bay for that part of the partial wall which is at a constant height. WALL HEIGHT (ft, mm) The distance from the finish floor to the bottom of the partial wall.


166


3.3.8

Extension / Canopies

3.3.8 A

Extension / Canopies



167

3.3.8.1.1 Canopies/Extensions

COPY EXTENSION ID Using the pull-down list, the user can select an extension Id number to copy, and then click the Copy button. COPY BUTTON This will fill in all the extension information from the copied extension Id. It is presumed that one of the items will be modified to make this entry unique from the copied extension Id. After the Copy button is clicked, the user can through each entry and modify the information to make the item unique from the copied line. NO. OF DATA LINES The number of extensions on the sidewall. Multiple extensions are possible if they do not have a common extension beam.


168


EXTENSION TYPE The canopy/eave extension type. 'C' - Canopy Type - occurs along endwall or sidewall and beam is located below the roof line, 'E' - Eave Extension Type - occurs along sidewall and beam is located similar to an eave extension where roof panel is a continuation of the roof line, and 'N' - No facia, this allows removal of a previously input facia. Examples of 'C' and 'E' type facias are shown on: FaciaCE, FaciaCE2, FaciaCE3, FaciaCE4, and FaciaCE5 WALL ID 1 for left endwall, 2 for front sidewall, 3 for right endwall, and 4 for the back sidewall. BAY ID - Left The bay number at which the sidewall eave extension or canopy starts. Bays are numbered from left to right along the wall, as you view the wall from outside the building. BAY ID - Right The bay number at which the sidewall eave extension or canopy ends. Bays are numbered from left to right along the wall, as you view the wall from outside the building. WIDTH, (ft, mm) The horizontal distance that the sidewall eave extends beyond the outside edge of the building. HEIGHT, (ft, mm) The vertical distance from the floor line to the intersection of the eave extension or canopy roof panels with the wall panels. SLOPE Rise in 12 horizontal for English units, rise in 100 horizontal for metric units. Set the rise for the slope of the extension. PURLIN EXTENSION, START If flush or bypass roof purlins are used and they extend beyond the start bay of the sidewall eave extension, then use the purlin extension for the start bay of the sidewall eave extension. For flush case, the eave strut will extend to support an end extension beam. At the endwall, © 2011 Metal Building Software, Inc


169

the end extension beam is attached to the first purlin above the building line eave strut. Not at the endwall, the end extension beam attaches to the building line eave strut. This added end extension beam supports the short purlins and at the endwall supports the building line eave strut. PURLIN EXTENSION, END If flush or bypass roof purlins are used and they extend beyond the end bay of the sidewall eave extension, then use the purlin extension for the end bay of the sidewall eave extension. For flush case, the eave strut will extend to support an end extension beam. At the endwall, the end extension beam is attached to the first purlin above the building line eave strut. Not at the endwall, the end extension beam attaches to the building line eave strut. This added end extension beam supports the short purlins and at the endwall supports the building line eave strut. PURLIN TYPE The two letter designation for any of the available purlin types. Example is ZB for bypass or ZF for flush. By calling for a bypass purlin, the program will design beam extensions that are below the purlins. By calling for flush purlins, the program will design extension beams that place the top of the beam flush with the top flange of the purlin. EAVE STRUT TYPE The 2 letter code for the eave strut type selected. 'EO' - Eave Strut Outside mount, 'ZB' - Zee shape Bypass eave strut, 'ZO' - Zee shape Outside mount, 'JF' - Joist shape flush mount, or 'JO' - Joist shape outside mount. Note: all eave strut types except 'JF' attach to the soldier columns. 'JF' purlin types span between rigid frames and do not attach to soldier columns. MEMBER TYPE The member type for the interior extension or canopy beams. The rafter at the endwall will extend out as the extension for 'ZB' purlin type, or the same rafter type will bolt to the top of the rafter for the 'ZF' purlin type. The following member types are available: R = hot rolled member from DS_RCOL.siz file, W = welded plate member from the DS_WCOL,siz file, T = welded plate member made from plates which are in the DS_PLATE.siz file, C = single C from the DS_CCOL.siz file, and D = double C from the DS_DCOL.siz file. MEMBER SHAPE One of the following to designate member shape: C = Constant depth, T = Tapered shape, and H = For a tapered member, a horizontal bottom flange will be provided. For a constant depth member, the member will be horizontal.


170


SOFFIT TYPE Two letter designation that is defined in the soffit panel data line. SOFFIT COLOR Two letter designation that is defined in the DT_COLOR.siz file. SOFFIT STYLE Two letter designation that represents the trim style. This can be used to differentiate size or styles designated in the DT_TRIM.siz file. Style entries must also be included in the DT_COLOR.siz file to be available in pull-down list. 3.3.8.1.2 Gable Extensions

SURFACE ID The surface number which will receive the gable extension. LEFT END (ft, mm) The distance the roof extends beyond the outside face of the endwall girt at the left and right endwall. Set the extension for each roof surface. RIGHT END (ft, mm) The distance the roof extends beyond the outside face of the endwall girt at the left and right endwall. Set the extension for each roof surface. SOFFIT © 2011 Metal Building Software, Inc


171

The soffit panel type if soffit panels are to be provided to cover the underside of the purlins. This can be a 4 character panel type. An N indicates that soffit panels will not be used. The soffit color, where the first 2 characters are the soffit panel color, and the third and fourth characters are the soffit trim style as noted in the DT_TRIM.siz file. SOFFIT TYPE Two letter designation that is defined in the soffit panel data line. SOFFIT COLOR Two letter designation that is defined in the DT_COLOR.siz file. SOFFIT STYLE Two letter designation for soffit trim style.


172

3.3.8 B


Facia 1



173

3.3.8.2.1 Location

COPY FACIA ID Using the pull-down list, the user can select a facia Id number to copy, and then click the Copy button. COPY BUTTON This will fill in all the facia1 information from the copied facia Id. It is presumed that one of the items will be modified to make this entry unique from the copied facia Id. After the Copy button is clicked, the user can through each entry and modify the information to make the item unique from the copied facia. NUMBER OF FACIA The quantity of facia to be defined. FACIA ID © 2011 Metal Building Software, Inc

174


Starting with 1 as the first facia defined, and numbered consecutively through the total number of facias. WALL ID The wall Id for the facia. 1 = Left Endwall 2 = Front Sidewall 3 = Right Endwall 4 = Back Sidewall FACIA TYPE The facia type. 'C' - Canopy Type - occurs along endwall or sidewall and beam is located below the roof line, 'E' - Eave Extension Type - occurs along sidewall and beam is located similar to an eave extension where roof panel is a continuation of the roof line, 'G' - Gable Extension Type - occurs along endwall and beam is located similar to a canopy beam. The building roof purlins and roof panels extend to the backside of the facia, and 'N' - No facia, this allows removal of a previously input facia. Examples of 'C' and 'E' type facias are shown on: FaciaCE, FaciaCE2, FaciaCE3, FaciaCE4, and FaciaCE5 Examples of 'G' type facias are shown on: FaciaG, FaciaG2, and FaciaG3 FACIA STYLE The facia style as selected from the DS_FACIA.siz file. This defines framing criteria, and connection criteria for design. BAY ID, START The bay number at which the facia starts. Bays are numbered from left to right along the wall, as you view the wall from outside the building. BAY ID, END The bay number at which the facia ends. Bays are numbered from left to right along the wall, as you view the wall from outside the building. EXTENSION, START If bypass roof purlins/facia girts are used and they extend beyond either ending frame line, then use the purlin/girt extension for the start bay of the facia. EXTENSION, END If bypass roof purlins/facia girts are used and they extend beyond either ending frame line, then use the purlin/girt extension for the end bay of the facia. ATTACHMENT BEAM ELEVATION



175

The height above the floor where the top of attachment beam (flush or no purlin) or attachment beam roof surface (bypass purlin) intersects the wall surface. The attachment beam is connected to and supported by the building columns. 'C' - Canopy type facia. Can be placed on any wall, and specify the height below the roof line considering purlin and endwall rafter depth. 'E' - Eave extension type facia. Can only be placed on the sidewalls, and specify the height as the eave height 'G' - Gable extension type facia. Can only be placed on the endwall, and specify the height below the roof line considering purlin and endwall rafter depth. ATTACHMENT BEAM WIDTH The horizontal distance the facia projects out from the wall surface. ATTACHMENT BEAM SLOPE The slope of the top flange of the attachment beam. For 'E' eave extension type facia, this is building roof slope. FACIA ELEVATION The distance above the floor to the bottom of the facia. FACIA HEIGHT The vertical height of the facia. FACIA SLOPE The slope of the facia. FACIA ARM SLOPE The facia arm is the framing member that is supported by the attachment beam. Use 'S' for the facia arm to be sloped at the same slope as the facia panel. 'V' for the facia arm to be vertical. FACIA BACK SLOPE When the back panel is present, use: 'S' for the panel to be sloped at the same slope as the facia panel or 'V' for the back panel to be vertical.


176

3.3.8 C


Facia 2

FIGURE 4 FACIA COMPONENTS



177

COPY FACIA ID Using the pull-down list, the user can select a facia Id number to copy, and then click the Copy button. COPY BUTTON This will fill in all the facia1 information from the copied facia Id. It is presumed that one of the items will be modified to make this entry unique from the copied facia Id. After the Copy button is clicked, the user can through each entry and modify the information to make the item unique from the copied facia. FACIA ID Starting with 1 as the first facia defined, and numbered consecutively through the total number of facias.


178


3.3.8.3.1 Purlin/Girt

PURLIN/GIRT STYLE Select the Purlin/Girt style from the available pre-defined styles listed in the DS_FACIA.siz file. Using the pull-down menu button, select the style to fill in the other portions of this screen. Each remaining entry can be individually edited by moving to the cell and selecting a different option. ROOF: SOFFIT: F_TOP: F_INT: F_BOT: GUTTER:

Purlins on top of the attachment beam Purlins on the bottom of the attachment beam Girts at the top of the facia arm Girts at intermediate locations on the facia arm Girts at the bottom of the facia arm Girts on the back of the facia arm for gutter

PURLIN/GIRT TYPE Select 'ZB', 'ZF', 'ZO', 'CF', or 'CO'. The first letter is the member type, and the second letter is the mount condition. Z or C is the purlin/girt member type. The B is for bypass mount, F is for flush mount, and the O refers to an outside mount girt with sufficient lap for each purlin/girt to be fastened with two bolts. PURLIN/GIRT DEPTH (in, mm) If the purlin/girt depth is to be set by the user, use desired depth, else use zero. EAVE STRUT TYPE Use 'EO', 'EF', or 'ZB' for the attachment beam eave strut. The first letter is the member type, and the second letter is the mount condition. Z or E is the eave strut member type. E is selected from the DS_EAVE.siz file and Z is selected from the DS_ZGIRT.siz file. The B is for bypass mount, F is for flush mount, and the O refers to an outside mount eave strut. 3.3.8.3.2 Panels

PANEL STYLE Select the Facia panel style from the available pre-defined styles listed in the DS_FACIA.siz file. Using the pull-down menu button, select the style to fill in the other portions of this screen. Colors and Styles are defaulted to the building wall and roof colors and styles. Each remaining entry can be individually edited by moving to the cell and selecting a different option. ROOF: SOFFIT: FRONT:

Panels on top of the attachment beam Panels on the bottom of the attachment beam Panels on the front of the facia © 2011 Metal Building Software, Inc


BACK:

179

Panels on the back of the facia

PANEL TYPE Select from the available Part Names as listed in the DS_PANEL.siz file. PANEL COLOR Select the two letter color code from the available entries listed in the DT_COLOR.siz file. Default information for the building input is used here: Facia roof color: Facia soffit color: Facia front color: Facia back color:

building roof color building wall color building wall color building roof color

Each entry can be individually edited by moving to the cell and selecting a different option. PANEL STYLE Select the two letter style code from the available entries listed in the DT_COLOR.siz file. PART Select the clip type and size to use from the available entries listed in the DT_SSEAM.siz file. Use 'FL' for floating or 'FX' for fixed. ROTATE The panel can be rotated 90 degrees from the standard orientation by selecting this option. For rotated back panels, the panel ribs would run horizontally along the wall. For rotated soffit panels, the panel ribs would run along the length of the facia. Check the box by clicking with the left mouse button, or pressing the bar on the keyboard. SPACING The maximum spacing of angle framing when using a rotated panel. 3.3.8.3.3 Gutters and Dow nspouts

USE GUTTER Check the box by clicking with the left mouse button, or pressing the bar on the keyboard. This will denote to use gutter behind the facia, else unchecked to not use gutter. GUTTER - COLOR Select the gutter color from the available pre-defined colors listed in the DT_COLOR.siz file. Colors are defaulted to the building gutter colors. Each remaining entry can be individually edited by moving to the cell and selecting a different option. GUTTER - STYLE


180


Select the gutter style from the available pre-defined styles listed in the DT_COLOR.siz file. Styles are defaulted to the building gutter styles. Each remaining entry can be individually edited by moving to the cell and selecting a different option. GUTTER WIDTH The gutter width. This controls the location of the eave strut on the attachment beam. A default gutter size is selected from the information in the DS_FACIA.siz file. GUTTER HEIGHT The gutter height. This should not be larger than the purlin depth. A default gutter size is selected from the information in the DS_FACIA.siz file. QUANTITY OF DOWNSPOUTS The number of downspouts to be used on the facia. DOWNSPOUT - COLOR Select the downspout color from the available pre-defined colors listed in the DT_COLOR.siz file. Colors are defaulted to the building downspout colors. Each remaining entry can be individually edited by moving to the cell and selecting a different option. DOWNSPOUT - STYLE Select the downspout style from the available pre-defined styles listed in the DT_COLOR.siz file. Styles are defaulted to the building downspout styles. Each remaining entry can be individually edited by moving to the cell and selecting a different option. END PANEL Check the box by clicking with the left mouse button, or pressing the bar on the keyboard. This will denote to supply a panel at the end of the facia to enclose the facia end, else unchecked to not use an end panel. 3.3.8.3.4 Trims

COPY FACIA ID Using the pull-down list, the user can select a facia Id number to copy, and then click the Copy button. COPY BUTTON This will fill in all the facia 2 information from the copied facia Id. It is presumed that one of the items will be modified to make this entry unique from the copied facia Id. After the Copy button is clicked, the user can through each entry and modify the information to make



181

the item unique from the copied facia. Facia Top Trim - occurs at the top of the front panel Facia Bottom Trim - occurs at the bottom of the front panel Facia Corner Trim - occurs at the end of the facia run Facia Soffit Trim - occurs at the inside of the soffit panel (building line) COLOR Select the facia trim color for each area from the available pre-defined colors listed in the DT_COLOR.siz file. Colors are defaulted to the building area colors. Facia top trim Facia bottom Facia corner Facia back

building eave trim color building eave trim color building corner trim color building roof panel color

Each remaining entry can be individually edited by moving to the cell and selecting a different option. STYLE Select the facia trim style for each area from the available pre-defined styles listed in the DT_COLOR.siz file. Styles are defaulted to the building area styles. Facia top trim Facia bottom Facia corner Facia back

building eave trim color building eave trim color building corner trim color building roof panel color

Each remaining entry can be individually edited by moving to the cell and selecting a different option.


182

3.3.8 D


Parapet

PARAPET LOCATION & EXTENSION



183

3.3.8.4.1 Layout

COPY PARAPET ID Using the pull-down list, the user can select a parapet Id number to copy, and then click the Copy button. COPY BUTTON This will fill in all the parapet information from the copied parapet Id. It is presumed that one of the items will be modified to make this entry unique from the copied parapet Id. After the Copy button is clicked, the user can through each entry and modify the information to make the item unique from the copied parapet. NUMBER OF PARAPET The quantity of parapet to be defined. PARAPET ID © 2011 Metal Building Software, Inc

184


Starting with 1 as the first parapet defined, and numbered consecutively through the total number of parapets. A quantity of six facia and parapets total is the maximum allowed. WALL ID The wall Id for the parapet. 1 = Left Endwall 2 = Front Sidewall 3 = Right Endwall 4 = Back Sidewall PARAPET TYPE The parapet type. 'PE' - Endwall column extended as the parapet arm. This requires flush endwall girts, 'PF' - Flush parapet where a separate arm is bolted to each column or rafter to support parapet girts, and 'N' - no parapet, this allows removal of a previously input parapet. PARAPET STYLE The parapet style as selected from the DS_FACIA.siz file. connection criteria for design and detailing.

This defines framing and

PARAPET HEIGHT (ft, mm) The vertical distance above the floor to the top of the parapet. PARAPET ELEVATION (ft, mm) NOT AVAILABLE BAY ID, START The bay number at which the parapet starts. Bays are numbered from left to right along the wall, as you view the wall from outside the building. BAY ID, END The bay number at which the parapet ends. Bays are numbered from left to right along the wall, as you view the wall from outside the building. EXTENSION, START (ft, mm) If top parapet girts extend beyond either ending frame line, then use the girt extension for the start bay of the parapet. EXTENSION, END (ft, mm) If top parapet girts extend beyond either ending frame line, then use the girt extension for the end bay of the parapet. 3.3.8.4.2 Girts

GIRTS TOP: Girt Type at the top of the parapet arm INTER: © 2011 Metal Building Software, Inc


185

Girt Type at intermediate locations on the parapet arm GUTTER/EAVE: Girt Type on the parapet arm for gutter BOTTOM: Girt Type at the bottom of the parapet arm NOT ACTIVE GIRT TYPE Select 'ZB', 'ZF', or 'CF'. Select 'ZF' or 'CF' for intermediate or gutter/eave girt. The first letter is the member type, and the second letter is the mount condition. Z or C is the purlin/girt member type. The B is for bypass mount and F is for flush mount. 3.3.8.4.3 Back Panel

PANEL TYPE Select from the available Part Names as listed in the DS_PANEL.siz file. PANEL COLOR Select the two letter color code from the available entries listed in the DT_COLOR.siz file. PANEL STYLE Select the two letter style code from the available entries listed in the DT_COLOR.siz file. ROTATE To rotate the panel means the panel ribs run horizontally along the wall. Check the box by clicking with the left mouse button, or pressing the bar on the keyboard. SPACING The maximum spacing of angle framing when using a rotated panel. 3.3.8.4.4 Gutter and Dow nspouts

GUTTER USE Check the box by clicking with the left mouse button, or pressing the bar on the keyboard. This will denote to use gutter behind the parapet. Gutter behind parapets are required on sidewall parapets. COLOR Select the gutter color from the available pre-defined colors listed in the DT_COLOR.siz file. STYLE Select the gutter style from the available pre-defined styles listed in the DT_COLOR.siz file. GUTTER WIDTH (in, mm) The gutter width. This controls the location of the eave strut on the building and the location of the gutter girt.


186


GUTTER HEIGHT (in, mm) The gutter height. This should not be larger than the purlin depth. DOWNSPOUTS QUANTITY The number of downspouts to be used on the parapet. COLOR Select the downspout color from the available pre-defined colors listed in the DT_COLOR.siz file. STYLE Select the downspout style from the available pre-defined styles listed in the DT_COLOR.siz file. 3.3.8.4.5 Trims

COLOR - TOP, CORNER, BOTTOM Select the parapet trim color from the available pre-defined colors listed in the DT_COLOR. siz file. STYLE - TOP, CORNER, BOTTOM Select the parapet trim style from the available pre-defined styles listed in the DT_COLOR.siz file.



3.3.9

Partition Walls


187

188





189

190




3.3.9 A

191

Layout, Framing

COPY LAYOUT - PARTITION ID Using the pull-down list, the user can select partition layout information for a partition Id to copy, and then click the Copy button. COPY BUTTON This will fill in all the partition layout and framing information from the copied partition Id. It is presumed that one of the items will be modified to make this entry unique from the copied partition Id. After the Copy button is clicked, the user can through each entry and modify the information to make the item unique from the copied partition. The first time this screen is loaded, the first item is the number of partitions. For the remaining partition Id numbers, the Copy Layout - Partition Id will be the first item on the screen. NO. PARTITION The quantity of partition walls to be defined. A maximum of 6 unique partition walls are © 2011 Metal Building Software, Inc

192


available. ORIENTATION The direction for the partition wall. Use: 'L' for partition walls that are the longitudinal direction, which is the building length direction. 'T' for partition walls that are the transverse direction, which is the building width direction. 'N' for partition walls that are not active. This option allows for predefining partition wall information. OFFSET, START Distance from the building wall to the start of the partition wall. The difference between the start offset and the end offset is the length of the partition wall. For 'L' orient walls, this is the distance from the left endwall. For 'T' orient walls, this is the distance from the back sidewall. OFFSET, END Distance from the building wall to the end of the partition wall. The difference between the start offset and the end offset is the length of the partition wall. For 'L' orient walls, this is the distance from the left endwall. For 'T' orient walls, this is the distance from the back sidewall. ADJ. WALL ID, START The partition wall Id for the wall occurring at the start of the partition. Use 0 for an exterior building wall occurring at the start, and for the absence of an adjacent partition wall. ADJ. WALL ID, END The partition wall Id for the wall occurring at the end of the partition. Use 0 for an exterior building wall occurring at the end, and for the absence of an adjacent partition wall. TIE-IN OPTION, START The tie-in option for the adjacent wall Id. Refer to drawing PT20 for available options. '-' = No column is present and tie-in option is not used. '0' or '1' = Column is not attached to other wall and location is not adjusted. '2' = Column is not attached to other wall and location is adjusted. '3' = Column is attached to other wall and location is not adjusted. '4' = Column is attached to other wall and location is adjusted. TIE-IN OPTION, END The tie-in option for the adjacent wall Id. Refer to drawing PT20 for available options. '-' = No column is present and tie-in option is not used. '0' or '1' = Column is not attached to other wall and location is not adjusted. '2' = Column is not attached to other wall and location is adjusted. '3' = Column is attached to other wall and location is not adjusted. '4' = Column is attached to other wall and location is adjusted. WALL SIDE vs LOCATION The wall location offset specifies the distance to the reference point of the partition wall. The wall direction is 2 characters. The first character specifies to which side of the reference point the wall framing occurs and the second character specifies which side of the wall is the



193

outside of wall. Outside of wall is important for bypass girts and for determining the girt direction for flush girts. 'LR' - the wall framing to the left of location offset, and the right side is the outside of wall. 'RL' - the wall framing to the right of location offset, and the left side is the outside of wall. 'CR' - the wall framing centered on the location offset, and the right side is the outside of wall. 'CL' - the wall framing centered on the location offset, and the left side is the outside of wall. QUANTITY The number of times this partition wall occurs. LOCATION The distance to the reference point of the partition wall. Distances are measured left to right as viewed from outside the building. For the 'L' orient walls the distance is measured from the left corner of the Left Endwall. For the 'T' orient walls the distance is measured from the left corner of the Front Sidewall. COLUMN DEPTH The desired depth for the columns. If the program is to determine the column depth, set to 0. COLUMN TYPE: START/END/INTERIOR Available partition wall columns are: O - cold formed Open Channel sections, C - C sections, D - double cold formed C sections, R - hot rolled wide flange section, W - welded wide flange sections, and U - hot rolled channel sections. The user can select a single member type by using a single letter, like 'C' or the user can select a first choice type and if the program determines that the first choice is not available in the required strength, the program will go on to the second choice in member type. First and second choice members are indicated by the order in which the data is set, that is 'CW' indicates use the C section if adequate, else use the welded section. Up to four member types can be in the selection process, such as 'CDRW'. Separate entries are available for start column, interior column, and end column. RAFTER DEPTH The desired depth for the rafters. If the program is to determine the rafter depth, set to 0. RAFTER TYPE Available partition wall rafters are: C - cold formed C sections and O - open C sections.


194


RAFTER ROTATE There are 3 directions available for the rafter. These are shown on reference drawing PT1. Orientation is used to specify the open face direction of the C or O section. 'L' is for left orientation, which is open toward the left endwall. 'R' is for right orientation, which is open toward the right endwall. Both 'L' and 'R' are oriented with the rafter web vertical. 'D' for the downward direction for the open face of the C or O section, and the web is horizontal. RAFTER OPTION There are 3 rafter options available. These are shown on reference drawing PT1. Option 1 is for rafters at top of columns only, and the rafters are between the adjacent purlins at the top of the column. 2 is for rafters at top of columns only, and the rafters are to the underside of the adjacent purlins at the top of columns. 3 is for a continuous rafter the full length of the partition. The rafter attaches to the underside of all purlins.



3.3.9 B

Bay Spacing


195

196


COPY PARTITION BAYS - PARTITION WALL ID Using the pull-down list, the user can select bay spacing information for a partition Id to copy, and then click the Copy button. COPY BUTTON This will fill in all the bay spacing information from the copied partition Id. Partition Id numbers are available for all partitions other than the current partition Id number. After the Copy button is clicked, the user can through each entry and modify the copied information, or for the next partition. SETS OF BAYS The number of sets of data necessary to describe the column spacing along the partition wall. A set of data consists of a bay width and number of bays. NUMBER OF BAYS



The number of consecutive occurrences of that bay width. Repeat BAY WIDTH and NUMBER OF BAYS as required to fully describe the bay spacing in the wall. BAY WIDTH (ft, mm) The bay width. Start with the bay at the start offset. Repeat BAY WIDTH and NUMBER OF BAYS as required to fully describe the bay spacing in the wall.


197

198

3.3.9 C


Girts



199

COPY GIRTS PARTITION ID Using the pull-down list, the user can select girt information for a partition Id number to copy, and then click the Copy button. COPY BUTTON This will fill in all the girt information from the copied partition Id. Partition Id numbers are available for all partitions other than the current partition Id number. After the Copy button is clicked, the user can through each entry and modify the copied information, or for the next partition. GIRT TYPE Use 'ZB', 'ZF', 'ZO', 'CB', 'CF', 'CO', or 'CL' where the first character represents the member type and the second character represents the mount or lap. C = single C section, Z = Z section.


200


B = bypass mount (lapped), F = flush mount (non-lapped), O = outset mount where the girt is in the same location as the bypass girt (non-lapped), and L = lapped C girts. The L is special for the C type in that an extra piece is supplied that accounts for the lap. FLANGE BRACE, USE Check the box if the inside flange is braced, else uncheck. (The flange brace spacing is set by DS_BUILD(ew4) SUPPLY Check the box if the inside flange braces are to be furnished with the building. SET DEPTH (in, mm) If the girt depth is to be set by the user, use desired depth, else set to zero. SET LOCATION Use 'N' for the program to locate each girt. 'Y' for the user to specify the location of each girt. 'P' (partial) for the user to set some girts and the program to locate the other girts. 'S' for girts at same elevation as exterior walls. 'I' for interval spacing, where the girt location determines the reported girt spacing. NUMBER OF GIRTS The number of girts on that wall. If zero is used, the program will calculate the standard wall girt spacing. GIRT LOCATION (ft, mm) The distance from the floor line to the girt, one value for each girt. TOP GIRT This is only used when the partition panel is not full height and this allows setting the girt type for the girt at the top of the panel. This specification can be different than the other girts, except that an outset top girt is not available with a flush girt since their location in respect to the column is different. Use 'ZB', 'ZF', 'ZO', 'CB', 'CF', 'CO', or 'CL' where the first character represents the member type and the second character represents the mount or lap. C = single C section, Z = Z section. B = bypass mount (lapped), F = flush mount (non-lapped), O = outset mount where the girt is in the same location as the bypass girt (non-lapped), and L = lapped C girts. The L is special for the C type in that an extra piece is supplied that accounts for the lap.



201

BASE OPTIONS ANGLE Check the box to have a base angle along the length of the partition, else uncheck. CHANNEL Check the box to have a base channel along the length of the partition. The channel selected will be to match the depth of wall girt. SEAL Check the box if the base seal (base trim) is to be included. The seal can be used with both the base angle and base channel. ANGLE/SEAL Check the box to use a special angle which serves as both the base angle and base seal.


202

3.3.9 D


Panels, Colors

COPY PANEL/COLOR - PARTITION ID Using the pull-down list, the user can select panel, color, and insulation information for a partition Id number to copy, and then click the Copy button. COPY BUTTON This will fill in all the information from the copied partition Id. Partition Id numbers are available for all partitions other than the current partition Id number. After the Copy button is clicked, the user can through each entry and modify the copied information, or for the next partition. PART NAME The panel part name as designated in the DS_PANEL.siz file. HEIGHT (ft, mm) © 2011 Metal Building Software, Inc


203

The vertical distance from the floor line to the top of the partition panel. For full height panels to extend to roof line, set to 0.00 and respond to the remaining questions in this section. PANEL TOP Use 'T' if the panels extend to the top of the roof purlins, 'B' if the roof panels are to extend to the bottom of the roof purlins. This affects panel length for both the longitudinal and transverse partition walls. PANEL COLOR The first two letters of this four letter code represents the color of the panel. PANEL STYLE The second two letters represents the style for the panel (not used). SCREW LENGTH The first letter of this three letter code represents the color of length of screw: 'S' for short, 'M' for medium, or 'L' for long. SCREW FINISH The second and third letters represent the screw finish as designated in the DT_SCRW1.siz file. TRIM COLOR: CORNER, JAMB, TOP, BASE This is a 4 letter entry. The first two letters come from the DT_COLOR.siz file and represent the color of the trim. TRIM STYLE; CORNER, JAMB, TOP, BASE This is a 4 letter entry. The second 2 letters come from the DT_TRIM.siz file and represent the style of the trim. INSULATION, USE Use 'Y' to call for insulation by metal building manufacturer, 'O' for insulation by others, or 'N' for none. INSULATION, TYPE One of the insulation types that is available in the DT_INSUL.siz file. INSULATION, THICKNESS (in, mm) The insulation thickness. INSULATION, WIRE Use 'Y' if the insulation wire is to be supplied, 'S' for insulation strapping, or 'N' for none.


204

3.3.9 E


Framed Openings



205

COPY FRAMED OPENINGS - PARTITION ID Using the pull-down list, the user can select framed opening information for a partition Id number to copy, and then click the Copy button. COPY BUTTON This will fill in all the girt information from the copied partition Id. Partition Id numbers are available for all partitions other than the current partition Id number. After the Copy button is clicked, the user can through each entry and modify the copied information, or for the next partition. All openings along each partition should be reviewed so that the section check is performed for each opening, because copied framed openings may not fit within the current partition. NO. OF OPENINGS The number of framed openings on that wall (0 to 20). No more than two framed openings are permitted in each bay, and a maximum of 20 openings are available per wall.


206


BAY ID The number of the bay that contains the framed opening. Bay 1 is at the start offset of the wall. OPEN WIDTH (ft, mm) The width of the framed opening. HEADER HEIGHT (ft, mm) The height of the opening. OPEN OFFSET (ft, mm) The distance from the left side of the bay to the nearest side of the framed opening. DOOR TYPE The first letter of this two letter code is the door type and the second letter is the framed opening type. If the first digit is blank then the door type is not considered. DIGIT (blank) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

DOOR TYPE Door type is not used. Walk door Self flashing window Standard flashing window Overhead door Inside mount roll-up door Outside mount roll-up door Louvers Overhead door blocking Inside mount roll-up door blocking Outside mount roll-up door blocking Window blocking Center sliding door Right sliding door Left sliding door Window blocking with diagonal rods

OPENING TYPE The first letter of this two letter code is the door type and the second letter is the framed opening type. If the first digit is blank then the door type is not considered. © 2011 Metal Building Software, Inc


DIGIT 0 1 2 3

4 5

6

7

OPENING TYPE Opening with no framing members used. Door jamb extends to the level of the next highest girt. Door jamb extends to the eave strut or the endwall rafter. A window where the door jamb extends from one girt to another girt, or to the eave strut. The window jamb does not start at the floor. The window jamb may cut a wall girt. This is for a completely open bay. That is, there will be no wall girts, panels, or jambs. The top of jambs extends to an 'added girt' at a height above the header as specified by DS_BUILD(Wall20) Strip window, that is a window that starts in one bay and extends into one or many bays. No headers or sills provided. Program places a C girt at the opening elevation and at the sill elevation. NOT available with Partitions. Opening between wall girts, no wall girts are cut. See PE 7-01-9.

SILL HEIGHT (in, mm) The distance from the floor line to the window sill. BASE ELEVATION (in, mm) The distance from the floor line to the bottom of the jamb base plate. REMOVE PANELS Use 'Y' to remove panels at framed opening, else 'N'. Set to 'F' for field located framed openings.


207

208

3.3.9 F


Partial Walls



209

COPY PARTIAL WALL ID Using the pull-down list, the user can select partial wall information for a partition Id number to copy, and then click the Copy button. COPY BUTTON This will fill in all the partial wall information from the copied partition Id. Partition Id numbers are available for all partitions other than the current partition Id number. After the Copy button is clicked, the user can through each entry and modify the copied information, or for the next partition. Partial walls along each partition should be reviewed so that the section check is performed for each partition, because copied partial walls may not fit within the copied partition. SETS OF BAYS The number of sets of bays, which are necessary to describe the partial walls for this partition Id.


210


BASE TYPE The item on which the base of the partition panels will be attached using 'BA' for base angle and any of the two letter designations for girts. FULL LOAD, GIRT and COLUMN If the girt at the base of the partial wall is to carry its share of the added wind load that accumulates on the wall below the partial wall, check the box, else uncheck. BAY ID, START The start bay for that part of the partial wall that is at a constant height. BAY ID, END The end bay for that part of the partial wall that is at a constant height. HEIGHT (ft, mm) The distance from the floor to the bottom of the partial wall. USE Currently not active. Program requires a '-' value.



3.3.9 G

Intersections


211

212


QUANTITY The quantity of intersections of two continuous walls requiring information. This information is required for design of girts and columns.

FIRST / SECOND PARTITION ID Information about the two continuous intersecting walls that are being defined. For the wall containing the column, define the column type and location. The other wall should not contain information, that is '-' for type and tie-in option will not be used. © 2011 Metal Building Software, Inc


213

COLUMN TYPE Available partition wall columns are: 'O' cold-form Open channel sections 'C' cold-form Cee sections 'D' cold-form Double-cee sections 'R' hot-rolled Wide flange sections 'W' welded Wide flange sections 'U' hot-rolled channel sections '-' indicates a rigid frame interior column, or no column in the wall being specified. TIE-IN OPTION The column option can be '-', '1', '2', '3', or '4'. See drawing PT20 for reference. '-' '0' '1' '2' '3' '4'

= No column is present and tie-in option is not used = Column is not attached to other wall and location is not adjusted. = Column is not attached to other wall and location is not adjusted. = Column is not attached to other wall and location is adjusted. = Column is attached to other wall and location is not adjusted. = Column is attached to other wall and location is adjusted. NOTE: Column quantity is doubled and the same column is placed on each side of the intersecting wall.


214


3.3.10 Accessories 3.3.10 A Light Panels



215

3.3.10.1.1 Roof Light Panels

NO. OF DATA LINES The number of data lines necessary to call out the light panels. Use one data line for each type of light panel on each roof surface.

SURFACE ID The number of the roof surface that will receive the light panels. PANEL QUANTITY


216


The number of panels. PANEL TYPE Enter a panel type from the available panel types in the DT_SKYLT.siz file. PANEL COLOR Use one of the available colors in the DT_SKYLT.siz file. PANEL LENGTH (ft, mm) Use one of the available lengths in the DT_SKYLT.siz file. PANEL OFFSET The panel offset is reported as follows: Walls: from eave line to start of wall light. To have wall panels cut, use 0 (zero). (See PE 9-98-9). Roof Surface: this is the distance from the peak of the building to the start of the roof light panel. REMOVE PANEL Checking the box will deduct roof/wall panel beginning at the offset distance through the light panel length. The panel lap parameters apply when calculating roof/wall panel length. 3.3.10.1.2 Wall Light Panels

NO. OF DATA LINES The number of data lines necessary to call out the light panels. Use one data line for each type of light panel on each roof surface.

WALL ID The number of the wall that will receive the light panels. PANEL QUANTITY The number of panels. PANEL TYPE Enter a panel type from the available panel types in the DT_SKYLT.siz file. PANEL COLOR Use one of the available colors in the DT_SKYLT.siz file. PANEL LENGTH (ft, mm) Use one of the available lengths in the DT_SKYLT.siz file. PANEL OFFSET The panel offset is reported as follows: Walls: from eave line to start of wall light. To have wall panels cut, use 0 (zero). (See © 2011 Metal Building Software, Inc


217

PE 9-98-9). Roof Surface: this is the distance from the peak of the building to the start of the roof light panel. REMOVE PANEL Checking the box will deduct roof/wall panel beginning at the offset distance through the light panel length. The panel lap parameters apply when calculating roof/wall panel length. 3.3.10 B Gutters, Doors

3.3.10.2.1 Gutters & Dow nspouts

GUTTER LENGTH (ft, mm) The length of gutter that will be used on the front sidewall and the back sidewall. GUTTER COLOR This is a 2 letter entry. These two letters come from the DT_COLOR.siz file and represent © 2011 Metal Building Software, Inc

218


the color of the trim. The STYLEs are specified in the DT_COLOR.siz file using 'ST' as the TYPE in this file. GUTTER STYLE This is a 2 letter entry. These two letters come from the DT_TRIM.siz file and represent the style of the trim. The STYLEs are specified in the DT_COLOR.siz file using 'ST' as the TYPE in this file. GUTTER TYPE This applies to building line gutter. This does not apply to facia, canopy, eave extension, or parapet. Use E for exterior, or I for interior gutter with double eave struts. NO. OF DOWNSPOUTS The number of downspouts to be used on the front and back sidewalls. DOWNSPOUT COLOR This is a 2 letter entry. These two letters come from the DT_COLOR.siz file and represent the color of the trim. The STYLEs are specified in the DT_COLOR.siz file using 'ST' as the TYPE in this file. DOWNSPOUT STYLE This is a 2 letter entry. These two letters come from the DT_TRIM.siz file and represent the style of the trim. The STYLEs are specified in the DT_COLOR.siz file using 'ST' as the TYPE in this file. 3.3.10.2.2 Walk Doors

DATA LINES The number of data lines that are necessary to call out the doors. Use one data line for each door type.

WALL ID The wall number where the walk door will be located. This feature permits the program to detail the door jambs for that wall. To use this feature, the walk door file must contain the appropriate data. If the jambs are not to be detailed by the program, use 0 as the wall Id. DOOR QUANTITY The number of doors of this size and located on this wall if the jambs are to be detailed for a particular wall. DOOR SIZE The door size and type as a single name (example 3070M where the size is 3070 and M is the type). See the door file for the list of available doors. © 2011 Metal Building Software, Inc


219

DOOR TYPE Y = yes for any standard type door, N = no. Additional references can be made to any door found in the DT_DOOR.siz file. DOOR COLOR The available door colors are listed in the DT_COLOR.siz file with a TYPE of 'DR'. When these entries do not exist the complete DT_COLOR.siz file will be displayed as available door colors. DOOR STYLE This is used to specify the trim style for doors. It is used with the '@JAMB' and '@HEADER' trim part names in the DT_DOOR.siz file, which are then searched in the DT_TRIM.siz for panel and trim style requirements. WEATHER STRIPPING Use 'Y' or 'N' for the weather stripping listed in your data file. HARDWARE - PANIC Use 'Y' to select this item, else set to 'N'. HARDWARE - MULLION Use 'Y' to select this item, else set to 'N'. LOCK TYPE Note the door data file has items listed under door type as 'LKST' that represents the standard lockset. To select the standard lockset use 'ST' for type. The other lockset options are labeled in a similar way. CLOSER TYPE Note the door data file has items listed under door type as 'HDST' that represents the standard heavy duty closer. To select the standard heavy duty closer set to 'ST' for type. The other heavy-duty closer are labeled in a similar way. ACCESSORY TYPE A two-letter code to indicate the type of accessory. The letters come from the data file and are the two letters that follow the 'AC' letters in the ACCESSORY column. 3.3.10.2.3 Calc Button - Gutter

See PE 4-02-2 for more information on this program to calculate gutter and downspout sizes. Clicking on the Calc button, the following will appear on the screen.


220




3.3.10 C Liner Panels


221

222


COPY LINER WALL ID Entries in the pull-down list are based on the value for Use. When the Use check box is empty, then the wall Id number is not available to other pull-down lists. Using the pull-down list, the user can select liner information for a wall Id number to copy, and then click the Copy button. COPY BUTTON This will fill in all the liner information from the copied wall Id. After the Copy button is clicked, the user can through each entry and modify the information as applied to the current wall. When liner information for a wall is copied and the information exceeds the maximum length or height, then the standard section checking will warn the user of the incorrect item. USE LINER Use 'Y' if liner panel is used on this wall, else 'N'.



223

LOCATION, START (ft, mm) The location along the wall where the liner panel is to start, measured from the left end of the wall as viewed from outside the building. If start is listed as zero, the panels will begin at the inside wall corner. Measured in ft and mm. LOCATION, END (ft, mm) The location along the wall where the liner panel is to end, measured from the left end of the wall as viewed from outside the building. If end is listed as the wall length, the panels will stop at the inside wall corner. Measured in ft and mm. LOCATION, HEIGHT (ft, mm) Height of the liner panels (ft, mm). A height greater than the wall height or 0.00 indicates full height liner. PANEL - PART Use one of the available type, gage, and yield in the DS_PANEL.siz file. PANEL COLOR Use one of the available colors in the DT_COLOR.siz file. PANEL STYLE Use one of the available colors in the DT_COLOR.siz file. DOOR TRIM Set to 'Y' if liner trim (framed openings, corners, top, and bottom trim) is to be used, else 'N'. DOOR TRIM COLOR The trim color, which is a two-letter code from the DT_COLOR.siz file. DOOR TRIM STYLE The trim style, which is a two-letter code from the DT_COLOR.siz file. The STYLEs are specified in the DT_COLOR.siz file using 'ST' as the TYPE in this file.


224


3.3.10 D Accessories

3.3.10.4.1 Additional Items

This section is for those items, which are a pass through to the BOM and Costing. Here the user has the ability to type in any item that is not otherwise included. NO. OF DATA LINES The number of data lines which are necessary to call out the additional items. QUANTITY The quantity of an item. Unit Weight, Unit Cost and Quantity will be transferred to the BOM. DESCRIPTION The description that will appear in the BOM. SUPPLIER ID © 2011 Metal Building Software, Inc


225

The supplier Id as designated in the DT_SUPLY.siz file. This will allow the item to be grouped together with other like items from that supplier and include the item in the summary reports from BOM and Shipping List. The default program behavior is for this field to be turned off and not displayed, in which case a Supplier Id = 0 is assigned and a mark-up or profit margin is not applied. For this case, the "Unit Cost" value entered should be the selling price. UNIT WEIGHT (lb, kg) The weight for an item. Unit Weight, Unit Cost or Price and Quantity will be transferred to the BOM. If unit weight is zero the entry is interpreted as a labor cost. If unit weight is non-zero the entry is interpreted as a material cost. Unit Cost would be the selling price to the customer. UNIT COST The cost or price for an item. Unit Weight, Unit Cost or Price and Quantity will be transferred to the BOM. If unit weight is zero the entry is interpreted as a labor cost. If unit weight is non-zero the entry is interpreted as a material cost. Unit Cost would be the selling price to the customer. The value entered will be marked up for profit as set in the DT_SUPLY.siz file for each supplier. When Supplier Id is not included as an input item, then Supplier Id = 0 is assigned and mark up or profit is also zero, which implies the value entered here should be the selling price (not cost). 3.3.10.4.2 Accessory Items

These items come from the DT_ACC.siz file. The user has the ability to choose any quantity of items from this list. These items will be passed into the BOM and Costing. FIND ACCESSORY This allows the list of accessory descriptions to be searched. Click the "Find Accessories" button. Enter the text to search in the Windows "Find what:" field, set the preferences for the search, and then click the "Find Next" button. The list will jump to the next entry that satisfies the search criteria. QUANTITY The quantity for each accessory. ACCESSORY ID This item is listed in the DT_ACC.SIZ file. The user prepares this file with the accessories that they want to have available. DESCRIPTION This item is listed in the DT_ACC.SIZ file. The user prepares this file with the accessories that they want to have available.


226


3.3.10 E Acc. Estimate

3.3.10.5.1 Accessory Estimates

This section is for default items that are a pass through to the BOM and Cost reports. They are considered alternates and are not totaled with the building price. These items are called from the EST_ACC.siz file. Items are defined by Quantity, Length or Area. FEATURE Cost report and contract can include accessories that were not ordered for the building. BACKGROUND One approach to quoting a building price is to include all the parts of the building in a single price. Another approach is to include a number of prices, first a price on the basic building and next the price of each of a number of building options. With this enhancement, the program © 2011 Metal Building Software, Inc


227

will calculate the price for a wide range in building options and include these options in the cost report and the contract. See PROGRAM ENHANCEMENT 12-95-2 on how to activate this feature.

3.3.11 Floors

3.3.11 A Layout

3.3.11.1.1 Layout

NUMBER OF FLOORS The quantity of floor systems within the building. COPY FLOOR ID Using the pull-down list, the user can select the floor system that will be copied. © 2011 Metal Building Software, Inc

228


COPY BUTTON This will fill in the currently highlighted floor system line to match the floor id that was selected to be copied. FLOOR ID The identification number assigned to the floor. JOIST ORIENTATION 'L' = Longitudinal, joists are in the building length direction 'T' = Transverse, joists are in the building width direction. WIDTH, (ft, mm) The nominal floor width direction is perpendicular to the joist direction. When floor joist rotation is 'T', then the width is the building length direction. When floor joist direction is 'L', then the width is the building width direction. LENGTH, (ft, mm) The floor length direction is the same as the joist direction. When floor joist rotation is 'T', then the length is the building width direction. When floor joist direction is 'L', then the length is the building length direction. BACK SIDEWALL OFFSET, (ft, mm) Distance from the back sidewall to closest edge of floor. LEFT ENDWALL OFFSET, (ft, mm) Distance from the left endwall to closest edge of floor. ELEVATION, (ft, mm) Distance from finish floor elevation of the building to the top of the floor component selected in Elevation Locate. ELEVATION LOCATE The reference location for top of floor can be to one of the following components: 'F' = top of Finish Floor 'J' = top of Joist 'B' = top of Beam 3.3.11.1.2 Clearance

UNDER JOIST, (ft, mm) Distance from finish floor elevation of the building to the bottom of the floor joist, opening header, and perimeter beam. OVER BEAM, (ft, mm) Distance from finish floor to the bottom of the rigid frame rafter or to the bottom of a floor support beam UNDER BEAM, (ft, mm)



229

Distance from finish floor elevation of the building to the bottom of the floor support beam. 3.3.11 B Decking

3.3.11.2.1 Decking

FLOOR TYPE From the pull-down list, select the decking type to use: 'CS' = Concrete with Sheeting 'CL' = Light Weight Concrete 'PC' = Precast Concrete 'MG' = Metal Grating 'MD' = Metal Decking Only 'PL' = Plywood FLOOR THICKNESS (in, mm) The total thickness of material between the top of floor deck to top of joist. © 2011 Metal Building Software, Inc

230


PANEL TYPE From the pull-down list, select the panel type to use. 3.3.11.2.2 Floor Reference

LEFT ENDWALL Items available in a pull-down list depend on the condition at each floor edge. Floor locations are input to touch the outside of exterior walls as a nominal location. Floor reference defines the actual edge of floor deck to be measured from one of the available reference options of: 'S' - steel line, or the flat of the exterior panel, 'C' - column line, or outside of column flange, 'G' - girt line, or the inside of girt flange, or 'P' - panel line, or the hi-rib of any interior panel such as liner or partition All floors that do not extend to an exterior wall will have a reference of: 'X' - extended, or floor extends a nominal amount beyond any existing centerline Items available in a pull-down list depend on the condition at each floor edge. FRONT SIDEWALL Items available in a pull-down list depend on the condition at each floor edge. Floor locations are input to touch the outside of exterior walls as a nominal location. Floor reference defines the actual edge of floor deck to be measured from one of the available reference options of: 'S' - steel line, or the flat of the exterior panel, 'C' - column line, or outside of column flange, 'G' - girt line, or the inside of girt flange, or 'P' - panel line, or the hi-rib of any interior panel such as liner or partition All floors that do not extend to an exterior wall will have a reference of: 'X' - extended, or floor extends a nominal amount beyond any existing centerline Items available in a pull-down list depend on the condition at each floor edge. RIGHT ENDWALL Items available in a pull-down list depend on the condition at each floor edge. Floor locations are input to touch the outside of exterior walls as a nominal location. Floor reference defines the actual edge of floor deck to be measured from one of the available reference options of: 'S' - steel line, or the flat of the exterior panel, 'C' - column line, or outside of column flange, 'G' - girt line, or the inside of girt flange, or 'P' - panel line, or the hi-rib of any interior panel such as liner or partition All floors that do not extend to an exterior wall will have a reference of: 'X' - extended, or floor extends a nominal amount beyond any existing centerline



231

Items available in a pull-down list depend on the condition at each floor edge. BACK SIDEWALL Items available in a pull-down list depend on the condition at each floor edge. Floor locations are input to touch the outside of exterior walls as a nominal location. Floor reference defines the actual edge of floor deck to be measured from one of the available reference options of: 'S' - steel line, or the flat of the exterior panel, 'C' - column line, or outside of column flange, 'G' - girt line, or the inside of girt flange, or 'P' - panel line, or the hi-rib of any interior panel such as liner or partition All floors that do not extend to an exterior wall will have a reference of: 'X' - extended, or floor extends a nominal amount beyond any existing centerline Items available in a pull-down list depend on the condition at each floor edge. 3.3.11.2.3 Panels

PANEL COLOR Use a two character designation for each color. The color choices and the two character codes are in the pull-down menu. These colors are referenced in the DT_COLOR.siz file. In each report where the color is reported, a definition of the two letter designation will be made. OPEN TRIM COLOR Use a two character designation for each color. The color choices and the two character codes are in the pull-down menu. These colors are referenced in the DT_COLOR.siz file. In each report where the color is reported, a definition of the two letter designation will be made. OPEN TRIM STYLE Style is used to choose unique profiles or types of panel/trim. Roof style is for unique ridge caps. Roof trim style is for unique gable trim. SCREW LENGTH Use S, M, or L for the screw length as small, medium, or long. SCREW FINISH This is a two character field, where the two characters are for the screw finish as defined in the DT_SCRW1.siz file. Finish entries must also be set in the DT_COLOR.siz file using 'FN' as the TYPE in this file to be available in the pull-down list.


232


3.3.11 C Joists

3.3.11.3.1 Joists

COPY JOISTS ID Using the pull-down list, the user can select the floor system that will be copied. COPY BUTTON This will fill in the currently highlighted floor joist line to match with the floor id that was selected to be copied. TYPE 'JO' 'CB' 'CF' 'CO' 'DF'

= Joist Outside Mount with No Lap = Cee Bypass = Cee Flush = Cee Outside = Double Cee Flush © 2011 Metal Building Software, Inc


'DO' 'RF' 'RO' 'UF' 'UO' 'WF' 'WO' 'ZB' 'ZF' 'ZO'

233

= Double Cee Outside = Hot-rolled Wide Flange Flush = Hot-rolled Wide Flange Outside = Hot-rolled Channel Flush = Hot-rolled Channel Outside = Welded Plate Flange Flush = Welded Plate Flange Outside = Zee Bypass = Zee Flush = Zee Outside

MAX SPACING (ft, mm) This is the maximum space between any two adjacent joists. SET SPACE (ft, mm) A value of zero will allow the spacing to be calculated with the maximum spacing. When this value is non-zero, it is the spacing that is used. SEAT DEPTH (in, mm) For the 'J' type joist members, there is a seat at the end and this is the height of the seat at the end. MIN DEPTH (in, mm) A value of zero will allow the smallest available depth to be considered. To set an exact depth, have both Min Depth and Max Depth set to the same value. MAX DEPTH, (in, mm) A value of zero will allow the largest available depth to be considered. To set an exact depth, have both Min Depth and Max Depth set to the same value. SET LAP EXT (ft, mm) For bypass joists, this is the lap amount over the first support line from the end of mezzanine. A value of zero will allow the program to consider all available laps and optimize between the available laps set in DS_LAP.siz. SET LAP INT (ft, mm) For bypass joists, this is the lap amount over the interior support lines, and not at the first support from the end of mezzanine. A value of zero will allow the program to consider all available laps and optimize between the available laps set in DS_LAP.siz. 3.3.11.3.2 Locations

CALC Click the CALC button to locate joists. The calculated locations can then be adjusted and used by the program. NO. OF LOCATIONS The quantity of joist locations. With a non-zero value, only the displayed offset locations are used. OFFSET, (ft, mm) © 2011 Metal Building Software, Inc

234


This is the distance from the floor edge to the centerline of the joist. For 'T' direction joists, the distance is from the floor edge nearest the left endwall. For 'L' direction joists, the distance is from the floor edge nearest the back sidewall. 3.3.11 D Beams

3.3.11.4.1 Support Beams

COPY SUPPORT BEAM ID Using the pull-down list, the user can select the floor system that will be copied. COPY BUTTON This will fill in the currently highlighted support beam line to match with the floor id that was selected to be copied. TYPE © 2011 Metal Building Software, Inc


235

Member type is designated by a single character: 'C' = Cee 'D' = Double Cee 'R' = Hot-rolled Wide Flange 'U' = Hot-rolled Channel 'W' = Welded Wide Flange MAX JOIST SPAN, (ft, mm) Maximum length that a joist can be fabricated. This value controls when additional support beam lines are added. MIN DEPTH, (in, mm) A value of zero will allow the smallest available depth to be considered. To set an exact depth, have both Min Depth and Max Depth set to the same value. MAX DEPTH, (in, mm) A value of zero will allow the largest available depth to be considered. To set an exact depth, have both Min Depth and Max Depth set to the same value. SPLICE TYPE Splice type is designated by a single character: 'S' - Shear splice 'M' - Moment splice 3.3.11.4.2 Locations

CALC Click the CALC button to locate joists. The calculated locations can then be adjusted and used by the program. NO. OF LOCATIONS The quantity of beam locations. With a non-zero value, only the displayed offset locations are used. OFFSET, (ft, mm) This is the distance from the floor edge to the centerline of the support beam. For 'T' direction joists, the distance is from the floor edge nearest the back sidewall. For 'L' direction joists, the distance is from the floor edge nearest the left endwall.


236


3.3.11 E Perimeter

3.3.11.5.1 Perimeter Beams

COPY PERIMETER BEAM ID Using the pull-down list, the user can select the floor system that will be copied. COPY BUTTON This will fill in the currently highlighted perimeter beam line to match with the floor id that was selected to be copied. LEFT TYPE The Left side of the mezzanine is dependent on the joist direction. For 'T' direction joists, the left is the floor edge nearest the back sidewall. For 'L' direction joists, the left is the floor edge nearest the left sidewall.



237

The perimeter beam type is designated by a single character: 'C' = Cee 'D' = Double Cee 'J' = Joist 'R' = Hot-rolled Wide Flange 'U' = Hot-rolled Channel 'W' = Welded Wide Flange RIGHT TYPE The Right side of the mezzanine is dependent on the joist direction. For 'T' direction joists, the left is the floor edge nearest the back sidewall. For 'L' direction joists, the left is the floor edge nearest the left sidewall. The perimeter beam type is designated by a single character: 'C' = Cee 'D' = Double Cee 'J' = Joist 'R' = Hot-rolled Wide Flange 'U' = Hot-rolled Channel 'W' = Welded Wide Flange MIN DEPTH, (in, mm) A value of zero will allow the smallest available depth to be considered. To set an exact depth, have both Min Depth and Max Depth set to the same value. MAX DEPTH, (in, mm) A value of zero will allow the largest available depth to be considered. To set an exact depth, have both Min Depth and Max Depth set to the same value.


238


3.3.11 F Columns

3.3.11.6.1 Columns

COPY COLUMN ID Using the pull-down list, the user can select the floor system that will be copied. COPY BUTTON This will fill in the currently highlighted columns line to match with the floor id that was selected to be copied. TYPE The columns type is designated by a single character: 'R' - Hot-rolled Wide Flange 'W' - Welded Wide Flange 'P' - Pipe 'T' - Tube © 2011 Metal Building Software, Inc


239

ROTATE The column rotation follows the same rotation criteria as rigid frame interior columns. When the web of the column is in the transverse direction, then the column is not rotated. A single character designates whether or not the columns are rotated: 'Y' - Rotate Post 'N' - Do not Rotate Post MAX BEAM SPAN, (ft, mm) Maximum distance that a support beam can span. This value controls when additional columns are added. MIN DEPTH, (in, mm) A value of zero will allow the smallest available depth to be considered. To set an exact depth, have both Min Depth and Max Depth set to the same value. MAX DEPTH, (in, mm) A value of zero will allow the largest available depth to be considered. To set an exact depth, have both Min Depth and Max Depth set to the same value. BASE ELEVATION, (in, mm) Distance above or below building finish floor elevation to bottom of column base plate. Positive values are above and negative values are below finish floor. TOP CONNECTION The connection type is designated by a single character: 'B' - Bypass, continuous over top of column cap plate 'F' - Flush, connects to web or flange of column 'O' - Outset, starts and stops on top of column cap plate 3.3.11.6.2 Locations

CALC BUTTON Click the CALC button to locate columns. The calculated locations can then be adjusted and used by the program. NUMBER OF LOCATIONS The quantity of column locations. With a non-zero value, only the displayed column locations are used. TYPE The columns type is designated by a single character: 'R' - Hot-rolled Wide Flange 'W' - Welded Wide Flange 'P' - Pipe 'T' - Tube ROTATE The column rotation follows the same rotation criteria as rigid frame interior columns. When the web of the column is in the transverse direction, then the column is not rotated. A single character designates whether or not the columns are rotated: © 2011 Metal Building Software, Inc

240


'Y' - Rotate Post 'N' - Do not Rotate Post OFFSET, (ft, mm) This is the distance from the floor edge to the centerline of the column. For 'T' direction joists, the distance is from the floor edge nearest the back sidewall. For 'L' direction joists, the distance is from the floor edge nearest the left endwall. LOCATE, (ft, mm) This is the distance from the floor edge to the centerline of the column. For 'T' direction joists, the distance is from the floor edge nearest the left endwall. For 'L' direction joists, the distance is from the floor edge nearest the back sidewall. BASE ELEVATION, (in, mm) Distance above or below building finish floor elevation to bottom of column base plate. Positive values are above and negative values are below finish floor. TOP CONNECTION The connection type is designated by a single character: 'B' - Bypass, continuous over top of column cap plate 'F' - Flush, connects to web or flange of column 'O' - Outset, starts and stops on top of column cap plate



241

3.3.11 G Openings

3.3.11.7.1 Openings

NO. OF OPENINGS The quantity of floor openings. COPY OPENING ID Using the pull-down list, the user can select the floor system that will be copied. COPY BUTTON This will fill in the currently highlighted columns line to match with the floor id that was selected to be copied. WIDTH, (ft, mm) The width of the framed opening is the opening side dimension that is perpendicular to the joist direction. © 2011 Metal Building Software, Inc

242


LENGTH, (ft, mm) The length of the framed opening is the opening side dimension that is parallel to the joist direction. OFFSET, (ft, mm) The distance from the floor edge to the edge of the opening. For 'T' direction joists, the distance is from the floor edge nearest the left endwall. For 'L' direction joists, the distance is from the floor edge nearest the back sidewall. LOCATION, (ft, mm) The distance from the floor edge to the edge of the opening. For 'T' direction joists, the distance is from the floor edge nearest the back sidewall. For 'L' direction joists, the distance is from the floor edge nearest the left endwall. FRAMING TYPE, JAMB1 The Jamb1 is located nearest to the back sidewall or left endwall. The jamb type is designated by a single character: '-' - Remove the jamb as it is either near a perimeter beam or support beam 'C' - Cold-formed C section 'D' - Double Cold-formed C section 'R' - Hot-rolled Wide Flange section 'W' - Welded Wide Flange section 'U' - Hot-rolled Channel section FRAMING TYPE, JAMB2 The Jamb2 is located nearest to the front sidewall or right endwall. The jamb type is designated by a single character: '-' - Remove the jamb as it is either near a perimeter beam or support beam 'C' - Cold-formed C section 'D' - Double Cold-formed C section 'R' - Hot-rolled Wide Flange section 'W' - Welded Wide Flange section 'U' - Hot-rolled Channel section FRAMING TYPE, HEADER1 The Header1 is located nearest to the back sidewall or left endwall. The header type is designated by a single character: '-' - Remove the header as it is either near a perimeter beam or support beam 'C' - Cold-formed C section 'D' - Double Cold-formed C section 'R' - Hot-rolled Wide Flange section 'W' - Welded Wide Flange section 'U' - Hot-rolled Channel section FRAMING TYPE, HEADER2 The Header1 is located nearest to the back sidewall or left endwall. The header type is designated by a single character:



'-' - Remove the header as it is either near a perimeter beam or support beam 'C' - Cold-formed C section 'D' - Double Cold-formed C section 'R' - Hot-rolled Wide Flange section 'W' - Welded Wide Flange section 'U' - Hot-rolled Channel section OPENING LOAD, (kip, kN) The load applied to a member from stairways or elevators. LOAD LOCATION From the pull-down list, select the member in which to apply the load: 'J1' - Jamb1 'J2' - Jamb2 'H1' - Header1 'H2' - Header2


243

244


3.3.11 H Loads

3.3.11.8.1 Loading

COPY LOADING ID Using the pull-down list, the user can select the floor system that will be copied. COPY BUTTON This will fill in the currently highlighted loadings line to match with the floor id that was selected to be copied. USE / OCCUPANCY A single character is used to specify the Use Group or Occupancy classification: 'A' - Assembly 'S' - Storage 'O' - Other



245

DEAD The magnitude of dead load of any permanent items. (For example, Joist, Deck, Insulation, and Liner) COLLATERAL ABOVE The additional dead load that may or may not be above the floor in the future. COLLATERAL BELOW The additional dead load that may or may not be below the floor in the future. LIVE The magnitude of live load. PARTITION The partition dead load on the floor. 3.3.11.8.2 Deflection Limits

Member deflection limits are reported in terms of the span divided by a constant. Set the constant to be used for each member and loading. DEAD + LIVE Dead + Live Load. LIVE Live Load alone.


246

3.3.11 I


Options

3.3.11.9.1 Detail

With a 'Y' for each of the following items, that item will be detailed and included on the shipping list. With an 'N', the item will not be detailed nor included on the shipping list. DECK Floor panels. JOIST Zee or Joist members. BEAMS - SUPPORT The support beams that the joists attach to.



BEAMS - PERIMETER The perimeter beams at the floor edge in the same direction as the joists. COLUMN SUPPORT The columns added below the support beams. ANGLES - PERIMETER The edge angle for pouring concrete. ANGLES - BRIDGING The bridging for the joists. 3.3.11 J Bracing


247

248


3.3.11.10.1 Bracing

LATERAL SUPPORT BY MANUFACTURER For Future Use LONGITUDINAL The available brace types are: 'N' = no bracing, 'C' = cable, or 'R' = rod TRANSVERSE The available brace types are: 'N' = no bracing, 'C' = cable, or 'R' = rod


Part

IV

250


4

Designing the Building

4.1

Design Screen Layout The design screen consists of a block of input files and a block of output files. The cell labels represent names of parts of the building including sidewall, endwall, roof, crane, components and partition walls, and rigid frame. Additional output files include a framing summary, design calculations, and reactions & warnings.

4.2

To Do the Design On the toolbar, click 'Auto' and the click on 'Make All files on this screen'. Watch how the program first makes an input file, then an output file, and then moves on to do the same for another part of the building. As the files are being made, the cell will take on a different color indicating there is a file at that cell. Now the building has been designed and the output is in the appropriate cells.

As each portion of the building is designed, if a design warning occurs, that warning will be sent to the warning screen. When the 'Make All' design is complete, and warnings were sent to the warning screen, those warnings will, by default, appear on the screen. One can determine the cause of the warning by going to the design output file and viewing the results. Warnings can usually be overcome by either editing a data file or editing the input file.

4.3

To Use the Editor MBS has its own editor for editing and viewing the input, output, and data files. Help files and graphics files are accessible from the editor program by clicking the appropriate buttons from within the editor. Graphics help files are available for some input files by pressing . These graphics help files are available for EWDES, ROOFDES, and RFDES and assist the user with input of complex loading. © 2011 Metal Building Software, Inc


251

MBS Editor Keyboard Controls Selecting Text: To select a section of text, position the cursor at the beginning of the section. Hold the key down and use the arrow keys or the mouse to move the cursor to the end of the section. Release the key once the section is highlighted Warning can usually be overcome by either editing a data file or editing the input file. In View Mode, the building editor can jump to the specific Sections or Warnings in the output. An example of the roof design output is shown below.

Editing: Cut Selection Copy Selection Paste Selection Delete Selection Undo last action

: : : : :

key

MBS Graph-View Keyboard Controls All keyboard controls for MBS Graph-View are located on the number pad on the right hand side of the keyboard. Zoom: In © 2011 Metal Building Software, Inc

: <+> or

252

4.4


Out Restore

: <-> or :

Move Image: Left Right Up Down

: : : :

Left Arrow or Right Arrow or Up Arrow or Down Arrow or

Help Files As described in chapter 2, help files are available from the control screen and while editing an input file or viewing an output file. The help screen on the file being edited is available with the key. Suppose you are unsure of the meaning of an input parameter on line 12 of an input file. Press or click on the help button to get the help file to the screen, then page to line 12 and read the explanation. Press the key to return to the file being edited. Click on the title for each line to see a description of the items in that line. Press the key and to obtain a help file drawing. To view the next help screen, press the key and key, then the key. To discontinue the help screens press the key and key twice. Pick from the list of available drawings, the drawing which is to be viewed.

4.5

Removing the Design Warnings Chapter 2 of the Teaching Manual provides advice on how to eliminate the design warnings. The advice is divided into four building areas: roof, sidewall, endwall, and rigid frame.

4.6

Checking Each Design Report As the person responsible for the structural design of the building you will want to check the design results. One can look at the framing summary or look in detail at each output report. The design criteria are described in chapters 5 through 8 of the Design Manual. The Design Manual also has a chapter on building codes. When the design is satisfactory, the results are available to the detailing and drafting areas of the program. One can look at the Framing Summary or look at each output. A graphic of the output is available by right clicking on the FRAMSUM cell and clicking on Graphic. In the Dealer version, clicking on Building Overlay and Views and then Building Overlay will also display the Framing Summary graphic. A sample building layout is shown below.




253

Part

V

Building Detailing and Drawings

5


5.1

Getting Started

255

The same people that entered the building data can carry out detailing and drafting, or, a person that has had no contact with the job up to this point can do it. If this is your first exposure to MBS, please read chapters 1, 2, and 3 of this manual. If the detailing and drawing is run on a computer that was not used for the design, it is essential that this computer have the latest MBS executable files and data files. The latest files can be placed on this computer using a network, floppy disk, compact disk, or other means. The job to be detailed and drawn will come to your computer as a packed job on a disk or through the network. If the packed file is called, HELP_JOB.ZIP, then make a directory with the name, HELP_JOB in the Jobs directory, C:\MBS_JOBS. Copy the file HELP_JOB.ZIP into the C: \MBS_JOBS\HELP_JOB directory. Start the computer as described in chapter 3. From the Job Manager, select the job "HELP_JOB". Now you are in MBS at the Design Screen.

5.2

Control Screens This is one of many operating screens available on MBS. Control screen operation is described in chapter 2 of the manuals for Design, Detailing, and Drafting. In MBS, from the menu tabs select "DETAILING". This screen will be used to detail the building, the following three screens will be used for drawings.


256

5.3


To Detail the Building On the tool bar click on 'AUTO', select, MAKE ALL CELLS ON THIS SCREEN. Watch how the program first makes an input file, then an output file, and then moves on to do the same for another part of the building. As the files are being made, the cell will take on a different color indicating there is a file at that cell. Now, the building has been detailed and the output is in the appropriate cells. These files can be viewed by moving the cursor to the cell and pressing the key or clicking the right mouse button and selecting 'View' or . The output file starts with an echo of the input file (when that file exists) and then reports the output for each item in that section. Much of the detailing output is used to prepare shop drawings. It is easier to check the detailing output by viewing the shop drawings, than by checking the printed output in the detailing reports.

5.4

To Make Shop Drawings In MBS, select the 'SHOP DRAWINGS' tab. Then select 'AUTO'-MAKE ALL CELLS ON THIS SCREEN. MBS will make all the shop drawings for the building. See Section 2.9 of this manual for a more detailed description of the shop drawing screen. Shop drawings are further described in Chapter 3 of the Detailing Manual provides a detailed description of the shop drawing program.

5.5

To Make Building Drawings Select BUILDING DRAWINGS tab on the tool bar. Note that the only colored cell is the one labeled DWGCTRL. The drawing control file is prepared by the user to direct the format or the building drawings. This file contains scale factors and drawing options for each of the drawings. One can select another control file for the building by pressing the keys or by clicking on 'UTILITIES' on the tool bar and selecting DRAWING CONTROL. Select that file which is the nearest match for the building being processed. It is not essential to find a file with a perfect match for the building since you can change any of the scale factors and drawing options as the drawings are made and viewed. Edit the drawing control file to meet your expected needs. (Unless previously prepared by the user, you may not have additional DWGCTRL files available. See Appendix A4.) Select 'AUTO'-MAKE ALL CELLS ON THIS SCREEN. The files on the left side of the screen are input files and can be edited. The files on the right side are DXF files and can be viewed and/or printed. Views each of the drawings, if they are not satisfactory, edit the input file and remake the drawing output. Most drawings can be changed to the satisfaction of the user just by editing the input file or through the "Options" with the output file. If a drawing is to be changed, beyond the available editing, the drawing can be moved into AutoCAD for more editing. Pressing 'E' or right mouse > edit, will automatically bring the MBS created DXF file into whatever electronic drafting dialog you have configured in the MBS.ini file. Use of the MBS editor and help files is described in Section 4.3 and 4.4 of this manual. Chapter 2 of the Drawing Manual describes those drawing features, which are common to all drawings. Chapters 3 through 8 describe the features of each of the different drawings.



5.6

257

To Make Combined Drawings A combined drawing is a single sheet that contains selected framing or sheeting drawings from various parts of the building. On the tool bar click the BUILDING DRAWINGS 3 tab and that screen will be displayed. Make the first input file, then the output file. View the output file. Read more about this in Chapter 10 of the Drawing Manual.

5.7

To Plot the Drawings On the toolbar, press the "Control" button, from the menu select "Batch Print", then select "DXF" as the file type. The list of DXF files for this job will appear in the MBS print manager. Follow the help file in preparing the batch drawings. The drawings can also be plotted through MiniView from the same cell they are viewed. A third method of plotting is to tag the cells to be plotted and use the Auto feature to "Print Tagged" files.

5.8

Outline for Checking a Building The program has just completed the detailing, drafting, and shipping list for the building in just a few minutes. Now, we move on to checking the output. Here you are asked to check, and if necessary revise, the detailing, drafting, and shipping list for the building. One approach that has been found to be helpful is let the program do all the steps up to this point, then print out all the shop drawings, building drawings, and the shipping list. Take these items along with the job order, and proceed to check the building.

5.9

How To Check the Rigid Frame Detailing A good example of checking rigid frame detailing is given in the first 16 pages of Chapter 3 of the Teaching Manual. Pages 7 through 12 contain shop drawings where the numbers in parenthesis refer


258


to detailed explanations on how those calculations were made. Also, the report contains an explanation on how detailing parameters can be changed to obtain different program output.

5.10

How To Check the Endwall Framing See pages 17 through 22 in the above reference for an example in checking the endwall framing.

5.11

How To Check Framing For: Roof, Sidewall, and Framed Openings See pages 23 through 28 in the above reference for examples in checking these items. In checking these items considerable reference is made to detailing parameters and detailing methods.

5.12

Detailing Methods Chapters 4 through 9 of the Detailing Manual describe the detailing methods used by the program. Each metal building manufacturer has different ways of detailing parts of their buildings. The program has to accommodate each of these needs to the degree possible. The program can do this through the use of detailing methods and detailing parameters. The program currently has over 557 detailing methods. To view the drawings on most of the detailing methods, go to the DETAIL METHODS screen. The detail methods screen is available with a click on the "REFERENCE" button. When you are at the Detail Methods screen, press the F1 key to obtain an explanation of the conditions covered by each drawing. View drawing DJ1 which illustrates the options for the base connection at the door jamb. The bottom of the drawing lists this as Detailing Method 9. For this building to use bolted angles at the base of the door jambs, DM9 should be set to 1. This screen just shows the options, you must go to the DETAIL DATABASE to change the option of the detailing method. Move the cursor to the cell labeled DT_METHD and edit. Page down the file to see if DM9 (on line 9) is set to 1. A similar process is used to set all the detailing methods to match those used by your company. Detailing methods can be the same for all jobs or they can be changed on a job to job basis. The Design and Detail files are accessed with the "DATABASE" button. The help button in the upper left of any database or output file will give further explanation.

5.13

Detailing Parameters In order for the program to know where to place all the holes in items, which are fastened together, it is necessary for the program user to set the hole location. That comes about by the user setting member and building detailing parameters. A visual of the member detailing parameters is seen in drawings PM1 and PM2 of the DETAIL PARAMETERS 1 screen at REFERENCES on the tool bar. The data is stored in the DT_MEMBR file, which is located in the DETAIL DATABASE screen. These help screens can also be referenced from the DT_MEMBR help button. A visual of the building detailing parameters is available at references in the other DETAIL PARAMETERS screens. It is also available in the Data File MANUAL under the PARAMETERS section. The drawings are divided into the major building areas. Note that drawing PA1 shows the anchor bolt offset from the web of the door jamb to be represented by detailing parameter 'ad'. A value for 'ad' is set in the DT_BUILD file located in the DETAIL DATABASE screen. Parameter 'ad' is in column 'a' and row 'd'.



259

There are currently 1316 parameters in the DT_BUILD file.

5.14

How To Check the Erection Drawings Chapter 4 of the Teaching Manual illustrates the process of checking and revising the erection drawings. An example of checking is to view the anchor bolt drawing shown on page 4-3 and note the numbers in parenthesis. Those numbers reference the information starting on page 4-1, which explains how to check if each of these values is correct. The revision process is illustrated with the anchor bolt drawing on page 418. Here the number in parenthesis refers to that data line on the input file, which must be edited to alter that part of the drawing. The explanation on drawing revision starts on page 414. As you read the building drawings you note a number of sections cut through the framing. A detail of each of these cut sections is shown on the detail drawing(s), DtDwg1. The input file for this drawing lists the names of the details that will appear on the drawing. You should check to see that all the details, which are called for on the building drawings, do appear on the detail drawing. If there are missing details, or the wrong details appear, the DtDwg input file should be edited to the correct values. The list of available details is in the front half of the Drawing File. They are also shown on the reference screens, DETAILS: EW, SW, ROOF, RF. Details are listed by a letter followed by a one or two digit number. In order for a detail to appear on a detail drawing, that detail must be available to the program in the form of a block file or DXF file.

5.15

How To Make a Block File If the default detail in MBS does not meet your exacting standards, you can edit the detail. When the detail has been edited it must be made into a block and saved as a DXF file. Then the DXF file must be edited so only the block definition remains. Appendix A1 of this manual contains the instructions for making a block file.

5.16

How To Make a Customized Title Block You can prepare your own unique title block and make it a part of each of your drawings. This permits you to take the information from the job identification screen, the drawing title, the date, and your unique logo and place it in your title block. See Appendix A1 for an example of this procedure. See Section 2.2.2 of the Drawing Manual for logos on erection drawings. See Section 3.2.5 of the Detailing Manual for logos on the shop drawings.

5.17

How To Check the Bill of Materials The bill of materials lists all those items which are to be included with the building. The items in the BOM should match with these three references: building order, shop drawings, and erection drawings. It should also be in accordance with your company policy on what is to be included in a building package. Pages 3-38 to 3-46 of the Teaching Manual illustrate how to check the BOM. The headings are by page in the BOM. If a listed item is incorrect in either quantity or details it may be a result of the data file from which the


260


building component is taken. Later sections of this outline provide additional information on those data files. The bill of materials also contains detailing information on many of the building parts. This may not be adequate for a shipping list so a separate shipping list is provided.

5.18

How To Set Up the Shipping List The shipping list is a rewriting of the BOM. The control for the rewriting is taken from the REPORT file located in the DETAIL DATABASE. The REPORT file can adjust the ordering of the items, the detail of the items, and the item cost. The ordering of the items is according to the DT_SUPLY file. The category for each item is set in the DT_COST file. Any item can be placed in any category and located in any section of the shipping list. An alternate method of controlling the shipping list is to use the customized shipping list. This is described in Chapter 9 of the Detailing Manual.

5.19

Editing the Shipping List As complete as the program is there still may be items in the shipping list, which need to be revised. A 'SHIPPING LIST EDITOR' has been set up for that purpose at 'UTILITIES' on the tool bar. The shipping list editor permits you to edit existing items or add new items. This editor is described in Section 9.2 of the Detailing Manual. When you edit the Shipping List, the program will make available in the editor those items listed in the DT_ADD file.

5.20

How To Enter Loose Clips into the Clip File See Section 3.2.6 of the Teaching Manual.

5.21

How To Enter Welded Clips into the Clip File See Section 6.3.7 of the Detailing Manual

5.22

How To Set Up the Punch File See page 3-24 of the Teaching Manual.

5.23

How To Set Up the Accessory File See Section 10.7 of the Detailing Manual, also the description at the start of the DT_ACC.SIZ file.

5.24

How To Enter Building Trim into the Program All items are entered in the DT_Trim file. Here trims are grouped by building location via 'Markers'. See PE 10-97-7 to see how to use this file.

5.25

Cross-Reference File for the Shipping List A cross-reference file has been set up which permits the transfer and redefinition of items from one section of the shipping list to the other. See Section 9.3 of the Detailing Manual.



5.26

Three Dimensional Building Drawings See Section 9.3 of the Drawing Manual.


261

Part

VI

Building Cost

6

Building Cost

6.1

Building Cost

263

This chapter describes how to make the building cost reports, the cost related data files, and some ideas on checking the building cost. The contract between the manufacturer and the client is also described.

6.2

How to Obtain Building Cost Reports Move to the Detailing screen and make all the files.

6.2.1

Cost from BOM View the BOM output file. The BOM lists all the items in the building. The right hand column is the cost of each item. A summary cost and weight report appears at the end of the BOM output. On line 2 of the input file these costs can be turned on or off. The default switch on BOM cost is in the REPORT.SIZ file. There are several other default switches in the REPORT.SIZ file relating to costs. Also, the DT_SUPLY file can be used to obtain a suppliers discount summary report.

6.2.2

Cost from Cost Report The cost report is on the right side of the detail output screen. This report provides a building weight and price summary. The building is divided into 10 categories. Following the summary, the building costs are divided into areas of the building. For example, to find the cost of the roof sheeting, note the sheeting in the roof section. The reported dollar value can be either the manufacturers cost or selling price. A costing option is the PRICE DISCOUNT SUMMARY adjusts the building price based on costs other than component parts. These factors are: complexity, discounts, commissions, engineering and drafting fees, taxes, freight, processing costs and packaging.

6.2.3

Cost from Shipping List The shipping list is also on the right side of the detail output screen. The shipping list contains the same data as is in the BOM. However, the content and form of each page of the shipping list is controlled by the user through the SHIP.FRM file and the DT_XREF.SIZ file. One option is to list the cost or price for each item in the shipping list. A common procedure is to run the shipping list once with the cost for checking purposes. Then to run it again without listing the cost.

6.2.4

Cost from Management Report On the toolbar, select "Utilities", then "Report Listing" or press the 'R' key and a customized list of special reports will come on the screen. One report is called the "Management Report". It lists both the cost and selling price and labor for each item in the building. The management report is a customized shipping list and can be modified using the customized shipping list features.

6.3

Data Files Used in Cost/Price Calculations The user controls the cost and price of the building components with the use of the four following files.

6.3.1

DT_COST.SIZ File This file, along with the others, is in the "Database" section under "Detail". Building items are listed by part name, followed by supplier id, color, standard costs and additional costs. Cost units are unit


264


weight, unit length, or each. Material and labor costs can be reported for each item.

6.3.2

DT_SUPLY.SIZ File The current use of this file is to list the supplier Id with a description of the items in that category. Supplier Id is the name given for divisions or categories of items in the building. Other uses of the file are cost discounts or markups. increases for each category. Also these features are expanded by the use of the DT_PRICE.SIZ file.

6.3.3

DT_PRICE.SIZ File This file permits the user to adjust the component costs with discounts and to mark up the costs with overhead, profit, and list. These adjustments are made by supplier Id. The discounts are used to bring the costs in the DT_COST file to the costs currently in effect. The mark-up or discounts permits the actual cost to be transferred to a selling price.

6.3.4

RF_COST.SIZ File This file provides the data for a detailed calculation of the cost of the rigid frame. The price of each frame component is given in terms of material cost and processing cost. Welding, painting, and cleaning costs are also included. This cost is determined in the rigid frame detailing program. The non-material costs are labeled as labor costs.

6.4

Ideas on Checking the Building Cost On first using the software one should check each building component for both cost and selling price. As the user becomes convinced that all the building components are present, then more abbreviated methods of checking are used. These include building cost per unit area and building weight per unit area. The current cost report includes the following: price per pound, price per square foot, and weight per square foot. For metric buildings, the weight is kilogram and the area is square meter.

6.5

Contract The contract cell is on the lower right corner of the Detail screen. This contract is between the manufacturer and the customer and contains a list of building features and the building cost. The CONTRACT.FRM file in the \MBS\REP directory controls the form and content of the contract. Building data for each job comes from the REPORT.FLD file in each job directory.

6.6

Additional Cost/Price Features Recent program enhancements associated with cost and price include: PE 3-98-1: PE 5-98-5: PE 5-98-6: PE 5-98-8: PE 11-98-8: PE 3-99-8: PE 5-99-8: PE 11-99-2: PE 4-00-3: PE 7-00-19:

Management report. Price adjustment based on building complexity, tax, freight, fees, and price multipliers. Weight and cost can be adjusted for delivered thickness of material and dunnage. Cost files can be in a binary format. Setup costs for coil changes. Customized summary at end of the shipping list containing weight and cost. Unit cost of rigid frames dependent on total weight of fabricated piece or weight per unit length of fabricated piece. Building cost can include coil setup charges Option to provide an extra largest sheet Price factors can be dependent on building code © 2011 Metal Building Software, Inc

Building Cost

PE 11-02-9:

Cost of dunnage and waste


265

Part

VII

Guidlines on Program Operation

7

Guidlines on Program Operation

7.1

Some Guide Lines on Program Operations

267

In the MBS Software there are many options for changing data. When a data item is changed, what programs need to be run to properly incorporate the change in the program output? The answer lies in the source of the data being changed. The following paragraphs list the data to be changed and the necessary programs to run.

7.2

General Operation The flow of data is from the design control input file and all the data files to the design, detailing, and drawings. The operational sequence is design, detailing, and finally drawings.

7.3

Change an Item in the Design Control Input File Run those design programs, which will be influenced by the change in data. For example, if you change the roof purlin spacing from variable to fixed, the roof design programs, input and output, will need to be run. The purlin spacing from the roof design is transferred to the rigid frame design input file so the rigid frame input and output files need to be run. The Frame Summary also needs to be rerun for any change in purlin size. Any changes in design will automatically be transferred to detailing and drafting programs by running those programs.

7.4

Change in Any Program Input File Just run the output program for that file. However, if this output influences other program output, then those affected input and output programs need to be run as well.

7.5

Change in a Design Build Parameter Run the design input and output file for that area of the building referenced by the parameter which was changed. That is, if a rigid frame design parameter is changed, run both the rigid frame input and output programs.

7.6

Change in a Detailing Parameter The general response is to run detailing programs that are related to the detailing parameter that was changed. An exception is that the design programs (such as minimum and maximum flange and web length) use certain detailing data. In that case, the design programs must also be run to incorporate the change. Included in this group of parameters are anchor bolt locations and bolted end plate parameters. All detailing is carried out by the BOM Program with the exception of the separate programs for: endwall columns and endwall rafters plus soldier columns and rafters in EWDET, rigid frames and flange braces in RFDET, wind bents and wind columns in WindFrm, eave extension and canopy beams in the CompDet cell, partition walls in the PartDet cell, and crane detailing in the CraneDet cell.


Part

VIII

A1: How to Make Block Files for MBS Programs

8


8.1

How to Convert a Pre-Drawn Drawing to MBS BLK Format

269

The following steps will guide you through the process for detail drawings. For other drawings such as a Logo drawing, the principles are still the same. I will be using AutoCAD 2000i in my examples. The process may be different if you are using a different version of AutoCAD or an entirely different program, i.e. GeneriCAD or IntelliCAD. 1. Run AutoCAD. 2. Open your drawing. For example, TRIM_18.dxf. 3. After it is loaded, Zoom to EXtents. NOTE: When you create Details, always remember that you are looking to stay within a 36" x 36" box. If you have to, drawing a box around the item, using 0,0 as lower left point and 36,36 as the upper right point. OR move the drawing so the lower left is at the point 0,0. NOTE: For user details that need to be bigger than the default, you can use TDF options to resize the detail. Related PEs: 2-00-5, 12-01-14. 4. If the drawing was Blocked before, select and eXplode the drawing. Using the purge command, remove the block information, in this example TRIM_18, from the file as shown below.


270


5. For ease in the program, we will move all of the items in the drawing to layer 0. In this example, there are three layers: 0 (default), 1 and 3.



271

6. To move the items to layer 0 and keep the current formatting, we must turn off layer 0 by turning the light bulb off (turning the layer off).

7. What you see is what is not on layer 0.


272


8. Each item (text, line, etc) will have a certain properties set. When selecting items, always select items that will be similar. For example, the three items above in Red are similar as they are all red. If you select something that is not similar, you may lose a property you never meant to. Note: some items will be a certain color 'by layer'. Select the items and change their color to desired as layer 0 will most likely be in a color you may not want. Do this also for line types. 9. You should end up with a blank page because all items are on layer 0 but layer 0 is turned off. Now purge the unused items, like before.



273

NOTE: You will need to do steps 8 and 9 for each item until the drawing is all contained on layer 0. NOTE: Polylines and hatch patterns are not usable on the MBS logo and detail drawings. You will need to explode and/or build the draw up to simulate these drawing types. NOTE: Only fonts that are SHX type can be used in a drawing within MBS. Arial, Tahoma, Verdana, etc are TTF (true type font) style and will need to be replaced by a SHX type. Make sure to add the SHX fonts to your \MBS\DOC2\DXFSTYLE.DEF file or you will only see txt.shx style text. 10. Now turn on layer 0. You can save now as old file or a new one. 11. Using the Block command, enter the name of block to be created but do not press Enter. Note: for logos and title blocks, use LOGO. For details, either user or MBS defined, use the file name. If you do press Enter, the window will think that you are done. But you never selected the items for this block. If you get this window, click Yes and select the objects.


274


After, you will return to the screen below.

12. Insertion Point: for logos and title blocks, use lower right corner of drawing. For details, use lower left. If you have been following my example, you would use the 0,0,0 coordinate. 13. Select Objects: when you click the button, the above window goes away and you are required to select ONLY the items (objects) that you want in this block. 14. Then press Enter. The block with the name, i.e. TRIM_18, will be defined with this file. 15. You will need to DXFOUT to save the block information to a file. NOTE: As of this printing, MBS only works with a version of AutoCAD R12 or earlier. For title blocks and logos, use LOGO.DXF or LOGOx.DXF if you are not going to use the default 'Y' option. For details, user or MBS defined, use the name of the block you just defined. In this example, we defined the block to be TRIM_18, so this is the file name that you DXFOUT as.



275

This is optional. You can set the number of decimals to the right of the period (significant digits). From this point here, DXFOUT command, you click on the Tools drop-down list and select Options. On the second tab is a place for the number desired. You may either use the 16 that is default or use a value from 0 to 16. Some MBS clients use a 2.

Then, press Ok to return to the DXFOUT window. Now, press Save to complete the DXFOUT command. 16. Now if you are creating a logo or title block, you will run the \MBS\UTIL\EXTRACT.EXE program to extract the block into a BLK file. See Using the MBS Extract.EXE Program for more help. 17. Otherwise, for all details, leave in the DXF format.

8.2

How To Make Block Files for MBS Programs These steps are very easy as outlined below. In the example, I am going to export the A1 block definition from A1.dxf to a TEST.blk that I will save into my BLK folder.


276


1. Using the Source Path button, navigate to the directory that stores the dxf that is blocked. Or select a previous stored folder from the pull-down. This will refresh the list of files shown. In this example, I will use C:\MBS\DXF as the source path. 2. Select the DXF file by left clicking once on its name. I will select the A1.DXF file. 3. Select the block definitions desired by left clicking once on each check box associated with the block reference to mark it selected. As shown in item A.5 above, the A1 file only has a block reference of A1. I left click once in the check box to select it. 4. Left click the Export button to display the Save dialog. You can use the highlighted file name or enter a new one. If you are going to overwrite a file with the same file name, the dialog with prompt you to enter Yes or No to confirm your choice. Clicking the Export button, I navigate to the C:\MBS\BLK where I store the BLK files. Since the TEST.BLK is not shown in the list of files for this folder, I enter the file name, TEST, as shown below and click Save.

5. You can close the program now. Finished.


Part

IX

278


9

A2: Obtaining a Renew Code for a MBS Hardware Lock

9.1

Obtaining a Renew Code for a MBS Hardware Lock 1. This is VERY important. Before you start the process, make sure that the date and time are current on the computer that has the lock you are going to renew. If you need to correct the time and date, you should do this now. This is VERY important. 2. There are two ways to get the needed information for renewing your MBS key. First, run MBS (depending on which version you are running, either Windows or DOS) and continue with step 3. Or, run the RENEW program directly from the C:\MBS\EXE2 directory. If you select the second option, please skip to step 7. For WinNT, Win2000, and WinXP, you will need to run the RENEW32.exe program. (Note: MBS may have already renamed this file to RENEW.EXE) 3. If you do not receive an error, skip this step and go on to step 4. When you try to run MBS and you get the "WARNING: No Active Hardware Lock Found (xxxx-xxxx-xxxx)" message, where xxxx-xxxx-xxxx is an error code. Just press ESC or click the Ok button to continue. Next you will get the MBS_LOCK.CHM file. You can press ESC or click the X in the upper right corner to close the window and continue. 4. Select a job. It does not matter which one. If you received the warning message like in step 2, just follow the steps in step 2 to continue. 5. When the MBS Info screen is displayed, press ESC or click on the Ok button to continue on to the Design screen. 6. Now, hold down the Alt key and then press the F9 function key. 7. A MS-DOS screen (if running RENEW.COM) else a Windows screen (when running RENEW. EXE or RENEW32.EXE) will now be displayed showing information you will need to get a renew code from a MBS Staff member. The screen will show the following items: Serial Number (a five digit number starting with 4 for parallel port key or 6 for USB) Use number (called the Use Count or RUC) Today's date (as currently set on your computer - shown in RENEW.COM only) RENEW program version number, if not 2.22. By default, USB MBS keys use version 2.31. 8. For RENEW32.EXE, the first item on the list (your MBS key by default) will be in the Choose One pull-down box. For RENEW.COM, the cursor will blink on the first number of the month of today's date. If you did not correct the time and/or date, you must do so now before you should continue. Close the Lock renewal window by click on the X in the upper right corner. Click the Yes button (for DOS version). When done, go to step 6 (or if you ran the RENEW program outside of MBS, go to step 7). 9. When you call MBS for a renewal number, a MBS Staff member will ask for the items in step 7: © 2011 Metal Building Software, Inc

A2: Obtaining a Renew Code for a MBS Hardware Lock

279

Serial number, Use Count/RUC, and Type of Lock (Full or Dealer version). They will generate a renew code for you which is a number of 17 characters long (12345-12345-12345 for example). If you are emailing or faxing MBS for a renew code, do not forgot to send the information from step 7. If you forgot to send the needed information, MBS cannot send you a renew code. 10. After receiving the renew code by phone, email, or fax, follow the steps below for the type of RENEW program that you are using. For RENEW.COM, you press Enter on the date. A line for entering the renew code will be displayed. Enter the code you received and press enter. For RENEW.EXE and RENEW32.EXE, you click on the Next button. This screen will appear with a Create Text File button. Click the Next button to continue. An edit box will appear on this next screen with the cursor waiting for a renew code. When done entering the renew code, click the Finish button to renew the MBS key. 11. Follow the prompts and if everything was done correctly you will receive one of three messages: Lock Renewed Successfully. Renew32 Completed Successfully. Expire Date Limit Updated, or A blue screen is displayed, showing information on the lock. In the lower right corner the number of days left will be displayed or lock is good til date. 12. If not everything was entered correctly, you will receive an error code displaying the problem. The program, ERRCODE.EXE, located in the C:\MBS\EXE2 directory, will give you a general description on what this error code means. Next, you should retrace you steps to see if you missed any steps along the way. Or, contact your MBS Administrator (contact person within your company) for help. 13. Just close any unneeded windows and DONE!


Part

X

A3: Keyboard Operation

10


10.1

MBS Function Keys

281

Standard Windows Clipboard Hot Keys for highlighted text are available for text editors and portions of the Building Editor. These keystrokes and their description are as follows: - Cuts the highlighted text from a text editor and places it into the Windows Clipboard. - Copies the highlighted text from a text editor and places it into the Windows Clipboard. - Pastes the text from of the Windows Clipboard to the current cursor position. NOTE:

Cell functions are the through keys as described below. Most cell functions are available by clicking the right mouse button. Alternate viewers or editors are available with the or and clicking the right mouse button.

Help on MBS Button - The help file for the MBS control program. - This will bring up the help file for the cell that the cursor is at. (i.e. If the cursor is at EwDes-L cell, the help file for endwall design) - Brings up the graphics viewing program. This is available on the Design screen for cells: EWDES, ROOFDES, RFDES, SCDES, COMPDES, PARTDES, and DESCTRL. This is available on the Detailing screen for cells: EWDET, PARTDET, and RFDET. or - Activates the MBS control menu. - Locks or unlocks a file. If you lock a file, you can not remake the file, or edit. You can only view the file. If you press this key again, you will unlock the file. or - Activates the utility menu. This allows you to go to the defaults lists, printer setups, program and report listing, project notes, shipping list editor, drawing numbering program, and "Zip Job to..." utility. - Activates the default file list. This list shows the default files that the user has set up, so that they can select a file, and it will be copied into the current job directory. This will run UTIL.DLL in the C:\MBS\LIB directory. In the BUILDING DRAWINGS section, the default list of drawing control files will appear. © 2011 Metal Building Software, Inc

282


Double-click the desired entry, or move to the entry you want to select and press . will quit without selecting. In the DESIGN and DETAIL DATABASE section, the default list of database files will appear. Double-click the desired entry, or move to the entry you want to select and press , or to quit without selecting. - Allows you to add new default files to the default file list. This allows you to add job files as a default while you are currently working on it. You will be prompted to enter a three digit Id and a description. The new entry will appear on the default file list when you start a new job, or when you press , as described above. This will run UTIL.DLL in the C:\MBS\LIB directory. In the DESIGN section, you can add the design control file to the default design control list. In the BUILDING DRAWING section, you can add the drawing control file to the default drawing control list. In the DESIGN and DETAIL DATABASE sections, you can add a database file to the database default list. This will add the database file that your cursor is currently on to the default database list. or - Activates the automatic operation menu. This allows you make or print selected files, make all files, tag all, or clear the tagged items. or - Makes a file. The file that is made is the cell that is highlighted. You can also point at a cell and double click the left mouse button. or TEXT: Edit a text file. Activates the MBS text editor to edit an input file. This will run the MBSEDIT.EXE file in the C: \MBS\EXEWIN1 directory. The graphics feature will only work with the MBS Editor. DXF: Edit a DXF file. This will bring up a drawing in your CADD program. The program will run each command line found in the MBS.ini file in section [DXF EDIT] that begins with Option1, Option1a, Option1b, etc. The first line (Option1) will generate a script file to be used by AutoCAD. The second line (Option1a) will begin AutoCAD and run the script file. or TEXT: Edit a text file. Activates the user-defined editor to edit an input file. The user defines the editor in the MBS.ini file in section [TEXT EDIT] that begins with Option2, Option2a, Option2b, etc. An example is to use the DOS editor or Windows notepad. You can also press the key and point at and click the right mouse button, then select (2) Edit from the popup menu. DXF: Edit a DXF file. Same as , but the Option2, Option2a, Option2b, etc. from the [DXF EDIT] section of the



283

MBS.ini file is used. or TEXT: Edit a text file. Same as , but the Option3, Option3a, Optionb, etc. from the [TEXT EDIT] section of the MBS.ini file is used. DXF: Edit a DXF file. Same as , but the Option3, Option3a, Optionb, etc. from the [DXF EDIT] section of the MBS. ini file is used. or TEXT: View a text file. Activates the MBS text editor to view an input or output file. This will run the MBSEDIT.EXE file, in View mode, in the \MBS\EXEWIN1 directory. DXF: View a DXF file. Activates the MBS DXF file viewer to view a DXF drawing file. This will run the MVW.EXE file in the \MBS\MINIVIEW directory. or TEXT: View a text file. Activates the text editor defined in the [TEXT EDIT] section of the MBS.ini file beginning with Option2, Option2a, Option2b, etc. DXF: View a DXF file. Activates the DXF file viewer defined in the [DXF VIEW] section of the MBS.ini file beginning with Option2, Option2a, Option2b, etc. - Paste from the clipboard. Move cursor to paste location, then . This function is used with to copy information and is used during building data entry. [This is a STANDARD WINDOWS keystroke]. or TEXT: View a text file. Activates the text editor defined in the [TEXT EDIT] section of the MBS.ini file beginning with Option3, Option3a, Option3b, etc. DXF: View a DXF file. Activates an alternative DXF file viewer defined in the [DXF VIEW] section of the MBS.ini file beginning with Option3, Option3a, Option3b, etc.
or TEXT: Print a text file. This will run the print feature of the MBSPRINT.dll file in the \MBS\LIB directory. Paper size, orientation, and printer are defined in the [TEXT PRINT] section of the MBS.ini file. If there is a warning message on the screen, and you press
or , the warning message will be printed. DXF: Print a DXF file. This will run the print feature of the MVW.EXE file in the \MBS\MINIVIEW directory. Paper size, orientation, and printer are defined in the [DXF PRINT] section of the MBS.ini file.


284


or TEXT: Print a text file. This will run the print feature of MBSPRINT.dll file in the \MBS\LIB directory. This allows you to use another print program, or use a different configuration setup for printing. DXF: Print a DXF file. This will run the print feature of the MVW.EXE file in the \MBS\MINIVIEW directory. Paper size, orientation, and printer are defined in the [TEXT PRINT] section of the MBS.ini file.
or TEXT: Print a text file. This will run the print feature of MBSPRINT.dll file in the \MBS\LIB directory. Paper size, orientation, and printer are defined in the [TEXT PRINT] section of the MBS.ini file. DXF: Print a DXF file. This will run the print feature of the MVW.EXE file in the \MBS\MINIVIEW directory. Paper size, orientation, and printer are defined in the [TEXT PRINT] section of the MBS.ini file. - File and system information. This will display the information about a file for the current cursor location, as well as free RAM memory and available hard disk space. - Hardware lock information. This will display the number of days left on the hardware lock, lock serial number and the expiration date. - Activates the hardware lock renewal program. This will run the RENEW.EXE (if not found, RENEW32.EXE) file in the \MBS\EXE2 directory. The serial number and RUC (renew use count) for each lock on the current computer are displayed. A lock is selected and the Next button is clicked. You will be prompted to enter a code, which you will get from MBS to update the lock. - Displays the MBS error message meanings and solutions.

10.2

MBS Hot Keys - Brings up the graphic viewing program. This is available on the Design screen for cells: EWDES, ROOFDES, RFDES, SCDES, COMPDES, PARTDES, and DESCTRL. This is available on the Detailing screen for cells: EWDET, PARTDET, and RFDET. - Brings up the Job ID screen for the current job directory. The Job ID screen can be changed and saved by using this key. - Activates the Job ID default file list. This list shows the default files that the user has set up, so that they can select a file, and it will be copied into the current job directory. This will run the file UTIL. dll in the \MBS\LIB directory.



285

While in any main screen, press , the default list of Job ID files will appear. Double-click the desired entry, or move to the entry you want to select and press . will quit without selecting. or and ADD Button - Allows you to add new default files to the default file list. This allows you to add Job ID files as a default while you are currently working on it. You will be prompted to enter a three digit Id and a description. The new entry will appear on the default file list when you start a new job, or when you press , as described above. This will run the UTIL.dll file in the \MBS\LIB directory. - Activates the MBS_NOTE.DEF file from the current job. Pressing the key will display the notes for the current job. While in the notes screen, entries can be edited, deleted, or the complete list printed as described at the bottom of the screen using the function keys. This will run the UTIL. dll file in the \MBS\LIB directory. or and ADD Button - Allows you to add new notes to the MBS_NOTE.DEF file in the current job directory. You will be prompted for the Date, Initials, and Description to define the new note. This will run the UTIL.dll file in the \MBS\LIB directory. - Activates the REPORT.DEF file from the \MBS\DOC2 directory. The default reports list will appear. This list shows the default report files that the user has set up. There are various types of report template files: CONTRACT, NOTE, SHIP LIST, or DXF Cover. Double-click the desired entry, or move to the entry you want to select and press and the report will be made and edited, or to quit without selecting. While in the reports list, entries can be edited, viewed, or printed using the standard keys: , , or to edit; , , or to view; and , , or to print. The key will run the UTIL.dll file in the \MBS\LIB directory. The program will use the REPORT.FLD file from the current job directory to substitute values for the variables listed in the template file and create an output file in the current job directory. Each template file type has a specific use described below. The CONTRACT and PROPOSAL types refer to a template file in the \MBS\REP directory. These template file types are used to create price proposals, or description information so that a customer will know items included and design criteria associated with the building being purchased. These input template files are in the format: NAME.FRM. Output files are in the format: NAME. OUT. See the Detailing Manual p. 8-7 for reference. The NOTE type template file uses a template file from the \MBS\REP directory. These input template files are in the format: NAME.FRM and the output files are in the format: NAME.NOT. These files are used by the erection drawing programs. The .NOT files in the current directory are used by the program if they exist, or the program will use the .NOT files in the \MBS\NOT directory. See the Drawing Manual p. 2-18 for reference. The SHIP LIST type template file uses a template file from the \MBS\REP directory. These input © 2011 Metal Building Software, Inc

286


template files are in the format: SHIP*.FRM and the output files are in the format: SHIP*.OUT. These files are used to generate customized list of materials required for a building. See the Detailing Manual p. 9-3 through the end of the chapter for reference. The DXF cover type template file uses a template file from the \MBS\DXF directory. These input template files are in the format: COVER*.DXF and the output files are in the format: COVER*. DXF. These files are used for drawing cover pages for erection drawings or shipping list cover sheets. More than one drawing cover sheet can be used, or extra drawing cover template files can be setup for different customers. See Drawing Manual p. 9-7 for reference. or and ADD Button - Allows you to add an entry to the end of the reports list. - Activates the PROGRAM.DEF file from the \MBS\DOC2 directory. The default program list will appear. This list shows the default program files that the user has set up. Move to the entry you want to select and press and the command will be run, or to quit without selecting. DOS batch files or executable programs can be listed. While in the programs list, entries can be edited using the key as shown at the bottom of the screen. This will run the UTIL.dll file in the \MBS\LIB directory. or and ADD Button - Allows you to add an entry to the end of the program list. You will be prompted for the Description and Command. The Description will be displayed when the programs list is shown and the Command is the program, which is executed when the entry is selected from the program list. This will run the UTIL.dll file in the \MBS\LIB directory. - Brings up a one-line command prompt, which is similar to using the SHELL command with the key except only one command at a time will be executed.


Part

XI

288


11

A4: Steps to Start a MBS Job and Source of Data

11.1

Steps to Start an MBS Job and Source of Data

11.1.1 Design Control

When starting a new MBS job the program begins by asking the user to select a Building Template. The Building Template is a predefined building. Often users will have Building Templates defined for each unique building type that is typically processed (i.e. gable building, single slope, lean-to, etc.) Selecting a Building Template similar to the building that will be entered greatly reduces the time required for entry. The file \MBS\Doc2\DesCtrl.def contains a listing of the available Building Templates. This screen is not displayed if no building templates are listed in the DesCtrl.def file. The file DesCtrl.xxx, where 'xxx' represents the ID column shown above, defines each unique Building Template. To create a new Building Template, first enter the desired building in a new job. Copy the file DesCtrl. in from this new job and rename it DesCtrl.xx1 (where 'xx1' represents any unique file extension). Place the file DesCtrl.xx1 in the \MBS\Doc2 directory. Edit the file DesCtrl.def with any word processor. Add the line: xx1 New Building Template (or any other description) Exit and save the file DesCtrl.def. When beginning a new job the user will now have the option of



289

choosing the new Building Template DesCtrl.xx1. *** An alternate method of adding to this list is to place the cursor on the DesCtrl cell to be added and press the keys. See Section A3 on hot keys.

11.1.2 Job Id

When starting a new job the program will ask the user to specify a Job ID. The Job ID screen contains the customer database information (i.e. customer name, address, contact person, etc.). If there are customers that the user is typically selling to, these can be chosen from the list above as opposed to entering this information on each job. The file \MBS\Docs2\JobID.def contains a listing of the available Job ID information. This screen is not displayed if no job IDs are listed in the JOBID.def file. The file MBS.xxx, where 'xxx' represents the ID column shown above, defines each unique Job ID listing. To create a new Job ID, first enter the desired building in a new job. Copy the file MBS.in from this new job and rename it MBS.xx1 (where 'xx1' represents any unique file extension). Place the file MBS.xx1 in the \MBS\Doc2 directory. Edit the file JobID.def with any word processor. Add the line: xx1 New Customer Info (or any other description) Exit and save the file JobID.def. When beginning a new job the user will now have the option of choosing the new Job ID referred to as MBS.xx1. *** An alternate method of adding to this list is to press keys in either Design, Detail, or © 2011 Metal Building Software, Inc

290


Drawing screens. See Section A3 on hot keys.

11.1.3 Database

When starting a new job the program will ask the user to specify Optional Database files. The Database Files screen contains the Optional Database files available to the user. An example would be to have an option to choose galvanized members. The file \MBS\Docs2\Database.def contains a listing of the available Database options. This screen is not displayed if no Database options are listed in the DATABASE.def file. Each database file is contained in the \MBS\Siz2 directory. For the above example the file DT_Color.gal, where 'gal' is represented in the ID column shown above, defines the DT_Color file with galvanized members. Create a new DT_Color.gal file. Place the file DT_Color.gal in the \MBS\Siz2 directory. Edit the file Database.def with any word processor. Add the line: GAL Option for Galvanized members (or any other description) Exit and save the file Database.def. When beginning a new job the user will now have the option of choosing Galvanized members. *** An alternate method of adding to this list is to place the cursor on the data file cell which is to be added and press the keys. See Section A3 on hot keys.



291

11.1.4 Drawing Control

When starting a new job the program will ask the user to specify a DwgCtrl file. These are referred to as Drawing Control files. These files contain the building drawing format, size and scale options available to the user. An example would be to have an option to choose 24" x 36" or 11" x 17" paper for the building drawing output. The file \MBS\Docs2\DwgCtrl.def contains a listing of the available DwgCtrl files. This screen is not displayed if no DwgCtrls are listed in the DwgCtrl.def file. The file DwgCtrl.xxx, where 'xxx' represents the ID column shown above, defines each unique Drawing Control file. To create a new Drawing Control file, simple edit any DwgCtrl.in file. It maybe easiest to do this within MBS. The user then has the ability to immediately make the output files to determine if the desired changes have been made. After the DwgCtrl.in file has been altered. Copy the file DwgCtrl. in from this new job and rename it DwgCtrl.xx1 (where 'xx1' represents any unique file extension). Place the file DwgCtrl.xx1 in the \MBS\Doc2 directory. Edit the file DwgCtrl.def with any word processor. Add the line: xx1 Building Drawings on 24" x 36" paper (or any other description) Exit and save the file DwgCtrl.def. When beginning a new job the user will now have the option of choosing the new DwgCtrl.xx1. *** An alternate method of adding to this list is to place the cursor on the DwgCtrl cell which is to be added and press the keys. See Section A3 on hot keys. © 2011 Metal Building Software, Inc

Part

XII

A5: Training Outline

12


12.1

Day 1: Building Entry and Building Design TOPIC 1.

2. 3.

4. 5.

6. 7. 8. 9. 10.

11.

12.

13. 14.

293

DESCRIPTION REFERENCE Overview of MBS Software Train 2 MBS Help, Hot keys, Function keys, Toolbar, Reference Drawings Select building to process To start a job in MBS Train 3 - Icon, Get Job, Add - Job Manager - Start screens: Design Control, Customer List, Special Data, Drawing Control Enter building data Train 2 Design 1-2 Design the building Design 3-11 - Sidewall / Endwall Train 3 - Roof - Rigid Frame - Eave extension/canopy beams, soldier columns, cranes, partition walls To detail the building Train 4 To view BOM output Detailing 7, 10 View shipping list Detailing 9 Contract & Certification Letter Detailing 8 Inventory Reduction Detailing 8 - Plate summary file - Comma delimitated files: Ship.Txt, PltSum.Txt To make and view erection drawings Train 4 - Drawing control file - Drawing options not in input file To edit drawings in MBS, Input Files and "Options" Drawing 1-8 - Anchor bolt Teach 4 - Endwall / Sidewall - Roof - Rigid Frame - Details To make shop drawings Detailing 3 Default settings for shop drawings Detailing 3 - CZE_DWG - FRM_DWG

Closed day with: Welcome, pass-through, MBS features


294

12.2


Day 2: Detailing, Building Cost, Price, and Erection Drawing TOPIC 1. 2.

3.

4. 5. 6.

7.

8.

9. 10. 11.

12.

DESCRIPTION To redesign building components To do engineering checks - Loading - Reactions - Moments and shears - Unbraced lengths - Member selection To set design parameters - Member files - Designer options, DS_BUILD(Help Icon) - Rigid frame depth points, DS_RFDEP Use of special screen programs Use of stand alone design programs Building Cost - Divide items into categories, DT_SUPLY - Set costs: DT_COST, RF_COST Selling Price - Enter mark up values, DT_PRICE - Added cost/price factors, PE 5-98-5, 5-98-6 - Management report, PE 3-98-1 Features common to most drawings - Customized title block - Adjusting line color and width - Text style, word substitution, notes - User select details - Edit and prepare new detail drawings Help Icon on Connections Help Icon on Program Enhancements Detailing Methods - Where to view - Where to set Detailing Parameters - Where to view - Where to set

REFERENCE Teach 2 Hand Calculations B-E Design Calculation Manual

Data Files 1-2

Design 12 Hand Calc A Design 5-8 Detailing 8 Teach 5

Drawing 2

MBS Help Enhancements Data Files 3 Detailing 1-2, 4-6 Drawing File 3



12.3

295

Day 3: Drawings, Detailing II, Shipping List TOPIC 1.

2. 3. 4.

5.

6.

7.

8.

DESCRIPTION Special Drawings - Multiple building plan - Cover page - 3D Drawing - Wall insulation - Liner Panels To load drawing into AutoCAD To plot shop drawings Combined Drawings - Selecting options - Making and revising drawing in MBS To hand check detailing - Rigid frames - Endwall frames - Wall girts - Roof purlins - Door jambs and headers - Loose clips - Panels How to set up a shipping list - Form for shipping list: Ship.Frm - Revise name and move page: DT_Xref Shipping List Editor - DT_Add file - DT_XAdd file To edit detailing data files

MBS_JOBS subdirectories Design Code files Processing a building with many accessories Review of options with anchor bolt reactions Enter and run sample building for quote


REFERENCE Drawing 9

Train 1 MBS Help Drawing 10

Teach 3 Hand Calc F G

Detailing 9

Detailing 9

Data Files 3

296

12.4


Day 4: Special Topics TOPIC 1. 2. 3. 4.

5.

6.

7.

8. 9.

DESCRIPTION Special loads on roof purlins Auxiliary loads on endwall columns Auxiliary loads on rigid frames Crane loading - Program generated loads - 2 or 3 cranes per bay Rigid frames with floors - Frame design - With mezzanine frame - Design, detail, draw beams Special frames - Tapered beam - Horizontal flange at peak - T-hanger - Stepped column - Fixed base design & detail Special buildings - With jack beam - Canopy building - Circular dome - Torsion wind framing - Two sidewall levels - Extended roof - X bracing and wind bent Guide to process complex buildings MBS Project: Main Building with Sidewall Lean-To Building

REFERENCE Ex. 4 Ex. 19 Ex. 26 Ex. 14 Ex. 24 Ex. 8 Ex. 20 Ex. 44 Ex. 10 Ex. 11 Ex. 15 Ex. 18 Ex. 45 Ex. 21 Ex. 23 Ex. 25 Ex. 28 Ex. 34 Ex. 47 Ex. 46 Ex. 36 Assistant, Help Files, Program Steps Handout



12.5

Training Outline for MBS Software TRAINING OUTLINE FOR MBS SOFTWARE TIME Day 1, Morning

Day 1, Afternoon

TOPIC Overview Select Example Building Entering Building Data Design the Building Set Design Parameters

Day 2, Morning

Detail the Building Detailing Methods Detailing Parameters

Day 2, Afternoon

Detail the Building Shop Drawings Erection Drawings

Day 3, Morning

Day 3, Afternoon

Day 4, Morning Day 4, Afternoon

*Manual Name **Chapter Numbers


Building Cost Shipping List Complete Example Building Process a building of your choice Continue to process building or a test on the training

REFERENCES Training* 1, 2** Design 1, 2 Training 3 Design 3-12 Teaching 3 Data Files 1, 2 Training 4, 6 Detailing 1, 2, 4, 5, 6 Data Files 3 Drawing File 3, 4, 5 Teaching 3 Detailing 3 Training 4 Drawing 1-10 Teaching 4 Drawing File 2 Detailing 7-10 Teaching 5

297

Part

XIII

A6: Description of MBS Sub-Directories

13


13.1

Description of MBS Subdirectories

299

MBS Software is contained in twenty subdirectories under the \MBS directory. Each directory contains different types of files accessed by MBS. The software requires that each group of files be contained in the correct directory. See Appendix 12 for a visual display of the directory structure.

13.1.1 BLK Directory The \BLK directory contains all the MBS block files. Block files are DXF files that have been altered to be read specifically into MBS. See the appendix of the Training Manual on Creating BLK Files for more information. MBS allows you to create a custom title block for all your building drawings. The custom block will be named LOGO.BLK. Specific BLK files can also be created for specific building drawings. For example, you may have a different title block for your anchor bolt drawing and one for your rigid frame cross-section. See Chapter 2 of the Drawing Manual for more information on customized title blocks.

13.1.2 CODE Directory The \CODE files are used to control deflection and loading where these items are dependent on building codes.

13.1.3 DOC2 Directory The \DOC2 files in this directory gives the MBS user the ability to have multiple default control files. Control files are the files that contain all the common default settings for design and drafting. See the 'Hot Keys' section on creating default control files for more information. There are two file types found in this directory. The *.def files are definition files, they contain a summary of the available files or databases that can be use as default selections. The other *.def files contain lists of available programs that can be altered within MBS. The *.001, *.002, *.003, etc. files are a list of the specific available default files. File *.001 would be default #1 and *.002 would be default #2, etc. These files typcially contain two columns. The first column is the extension of the various files the user is choosing from (001, 002). The second column is the description of the associated file. See the following example of a database.def file: 001 002

SIZ File Database for XYZ Building System SIZ File Database for ABC Building System

An example of a typical dwgctrl.def file: 001 002

Small Building (30'x40') on 11"x17" paper Large Building (75'x150') on 24"x36" paper

The mbs_pgm.def file defines functions that can be accessed by pressing the 'X' key. The file contains a DOS command line followed by the description. This file can easily be altered to contain commands of your choosing. Command lines that have an *.com or *.bat extension must have the extension included in the command line. For command lines that have an *.exe extension do include


300


the extension. An example of the mbs_pgm.def file follows: edit.com c:\MBS\siz2\dt_xref.siz edit.com c:\MBS\siz2\cze_dwg.siz command.com c:\mbs\util\chkcost.bat c:\mbs\util\combine

|edit dt_xref.siz |edit cze_dwg.siz |shell to DOS |make and edit DT_COST.NEW |combine SHIPLISTS

|1 |1 |1 |1 |1

Definitions of each of the typical files and reference to where additional information on the file can be found follows: FILE NAME Database.def DesCtrl.def DwgCtrl.def DxfLayer.def DxfStyle.def JobID.def MBS_Info.def MBS_Jobs.def MBSsetup.def (MS-DOS only) MBS.INI (Windows only) Program.def (DOS) MBS_PGM.def (WIN) Report.def

DESCRIPTION Definition file for databases. Definition file for design control files. Definition file for drawing control files. Definition file for setting line types and colors. Definition file to set font types for output drawings. Definition file for customer database. Definition file for job info screens. Definition file for database on existing MBS jobs. Definition file for MBS Setup List. Setup list is activated by pressing the S key. Setup for MBS Windows is done through the MBS.INI file. See the button labeled Help on MBS for reference. Definition file for MBS Program List. Program list is activated by pressing the X key. User defined report definition file. Allows the user to create many different forms of reports from within MBS. Press R key to activate.

13.1.4 DXF Directory This directory and sub-directories contains all the DXF files (Drawing Exchange Format) required by MBS. DXF is the standard file format for transfer between CADD packages. All MBS standard details are contained in this directory and can be customized to meet the user's specific needs. When running the FTP_Updater or updating by a CD from MBS, the directories below will be the destination. Files in these folders will be automatically overwritten. DESED DETAILS EXAM INPUT PARAMETERS PGMENH TDF

contains illustrations viewable by the Alt-F1 keystroke contains all MBS standard details contains illustrations for the MBS Example help contains illustrations not stored elsewhere contains all Parameter and Method drawings contains all reference drawings associated with a PE (program enhancement) contains reference drawings for Translation Editor



301

The MBS supplied files can be altered to reflect your exact needs but remember these folders above will be overwritten with newer files without asking. In addition, details specific to your company can be added. For more information on changing MBS standard details, please see the Drawing Manual, section 8.2 or Appendix 1. Please note that if you change any of the MBS standard details, store a copy of the revised files in a separate directory to prevent overwriting these files.

13.1.5 ERRORS Directory Used for temporary storage of error files while processing.

13.1.6 EXE2 Directory The \EXE2 directory contains all the individual program executable files required to run MBS. The only exception is the DOS4GW.EXE file; this file should be contained in the \MBS directory. NOTE: DOS4GW.exe is no longer used. When MBS compiled using a 32bit compiler, the old 16bit program is no longer needed.

13.1.7 EXEWIN1 Directory The \EXEWIN1 directory contains the files for the MBS Windows control program and MBS Windows Editor program.

13.1.8 FONTS Directory This directory contain the SHX font files that are needed for viewing the DXF output files. As an alternate, the user can specify the CADD fonts folder instead.

13.1.9 HLP Directory The \HLP directory contains all the MBS help files used in the DOS version of MBS. These files can be accessed individually while in the DOS version of MBS by press the F1 key while viewing or editing the files for which you activate the help. These files can be altered to add information that is helpful to you. The design, detailing, drafting or database file names correlate with the same help file names. NOTE: if you change any of these files, store the revised files in a separate directory to prevent overwriting the files when you are issued updated help files from MBS.

13.1.10 HLPWIN1 Directory The \HLPWIN1 directory contains the files for the MBS Windows Help. The files are a part of a compiled program and cannot be edited by the user.

13.1.11 LIB Directory The \LIB directory contains the files that control the screens in MBS Windows. All files have an extension of DLL. MBS.AVI is stored in this folder, also.


302


13.1.12 MINIVIEW Directory The \MINIVIEW directory contains the files to run the MiniView program that is used to view and print drawings. Files are generated by the program during software installation. NOTE: Miniview does not work with Windows Vista operating system.

13.1.13 NOT Directory The \NOT directory contains the note files. General notes can be placed on each of the erection drawings. For example, the information contained in the andwg-1.not file will be placed in the anchor bolt drawing output file if the option for general notes is selected in the input file (See Drawing Manual section 3.4 for further information). Another form of *.not file is the shiph.not file. This file contains header information for shipping list. See Chapter 9 of the Detailing Manual for further information on shipping lists.

13.1.14 PROJECTS Directory The \PROJECT directory contains the sub-directories Doc2, QuesGen, and Template. These subfolders contain the files used with the MBS Project software.

13.1.15 REP Directory The \REP directory contains format files. These files have a file extension of *.frm. Each file is a template file that controls the appearance and order of items written as an output file in the current job directory. There are four different report types available and a script file used by AutoCAD that require a format file from this directory. The four report types are, as found on the Report Type of the Reports Editor: CONTRACT, SHIPPING LIST, DXF Cover, and NOTES. The CONTRACT.frm produces CONTRACT.out for proposals, SHIP.frm produces SHIP.out for shipping lists, DXFCover.frm produces DXFCover.dxf for building drawing cover pages, and NOTES. frm produces NOTES.not for notes placed on building drawings. The current files include the following: FILE NAME DXFEDIT#.frm

CONTRACT.frm

DESCRIPTION Used as a template file to generate a script file to use when AutoCAD begins. The script file for AutoCAD is generally CADDEDIT.SCR and is contained in the job directory. This file is used in the MBS.ini file [DXF EDIT] section under the line Option#=, where # is the number 1, 2 or 3. Used as template file to generate CONTRACT.out in the job directory. This file contains variables designated by '@Fxxx' where xxx is a numeric value. Available variables and their values can be found by reviewing REPORT.fld file found in each job directory. © 2011 Metal Building Software, Inc


FILE NAME

LETTER.frm

SHIP.frm

303

DESCRIPTION This is used to generate a proposal for the customer. Used as a template file to generate LETTER.out in the job directory. This file contains variables designated by '@Fxxx' where xxx is a numeric value. Available variables and their values can be found by reviewing REPORT.fld file found in each job directory. This is used to generate a letter of certification that can be stamped by an engineer that is certifying the design code and loadings for the proposed building. Used as a template file to generate SHIP.out in the job directory. This file will list each part to be shipped with the building. Information reported for each item (quantity, part, color) and the page on which each item appears is defined by this file and the DT_XREF file. The shipping list is organized as established by this file.

13.1.16 REPORTS Directory The \REPORTS directory contains the files used to run the Comprehensive Design Report program. All of the files are created by the program during software installation.

13.1.17 SIZ2 Directory The \SIZ2 directory contains your default design and detailing database. The *.siz files are the default database files brought into your job directory when you create a new job. The *.siz files for each job can be edited or viewed through the Design and Detail Database screens within MBS. Altering files within MBS will only change the files in that job, not the files in the \SIZ2 directory. Any simple text editor can be used to alter the *.siz files, however, the file must be saved in the 'Text Only' format. MBS allows the user to have multiple databases available. These databases are defined in the database.def file contained in the \DOC2 directory (See section A6.4 above). As with the default DesCtrl or DwgCtrl files, each database will have files with the extension *.001 or *.002. To better identify the database names, you may replace the *.001 or *.002 with an identifier that has some meaning to you. For example, *.DLR may be a database for a specific dealer. Be sure that the extensions from your database files are correctly noted in the database.def file contained in the \DOC2 directory. Also contained in the \SIZ2 directory is the files cze_dwg.siz and frm_dwg.siz. These files contain information on altering the shop drawing output. Cze_dwg.siz pertains to the 'C' and 'Z' girts, jambs, headers, endwall columns, endwall rafters, and purlins and 'E' for eave struts. The frm_dwg.siz file is for rigid frame shop drawings. See the Detailing Manual for additional information on altering the output for shop drawings.

13.1.18 SYSTEM Directory The \SYSTEM directory contains the files used to control options within the MBS Windows program. © 2011 Metal Building Software, Inc

304


13.1.19 TRANS Directory The \TRANS directory contains all the files with the *.TDF extension. These files are used by the drawing programs to replace the standard text words or phrases with replacement words or phrases. The drawing programs will access these files from this directory that is they are not copied into each job directory. The typical file names in this directory are: EWDWG.TDF, SWDWG.TDF, ANDWG.TDF, ROOFDWG.TDF, and RFDWG.TDF. Each drawing program will access its own separate TDF file. A more detailed description as to the use of these files can be found in the Drawing Manual section 2.2.5. The *.tdf files are also used to modify drawings and files. See PE 4-99-6 and 7-00-26 for a description of these features.

13.1.20 UTIL Directory The \UTIL directory contains files used for utility programs that provide features that are independent of the main MBS program. The current files include the following: FILE NAME 3DM.BAT

DESCRIPTION BATch file to generate multiple building 3D drawing (See PE 5-01-6) Replaced by Project AISC05_A.EXE See PE 6-06-2. AISC05 W Check AISC05_P.EXE See PE 6-06-2. AISC05 W Check AISC_05.EXE See PE 6-06-2. AISC05 W Check BOMCHECK.EXE Program that generates additional files for checking the BOM output. The BOM program must have been made to use this program. Files generated include: SCREW.OUT, BOLT. OUT, TRIM.OUT, ANGLE.OUT. (See PE 2-01-9) C_CHECK.EXE C_CHECK routines C_PROP.EXE Program for calculations of Cee and double Cee section properties, C_PROP. CECS02EP.EXE Bolted End Plate design for the CECS code. CECS02.EXE W_CHECK strength routines by the CECS 102:98 code CHKCOST.BAT BATch file that uses COSTCHK.EXE to take the DT_COST. SIZ file from the current job and generate DT_COST.NEW and views the new files with a text editor. Two lines are required in the BATch file: C:\M BS\UTIL\COSTCHK WORDPAD DT_COST.NEW

COMBINE.EXE COSTCHK.EXE

(Program file to generate DT_COST. NEW) (Launches WordPad with DT_COST. NEW loaded)

Program that generates a combined shipping list from various jobs. (See PE 10-97-3). Program that generates the file DT_COST.NEW file. DT_COST.NEW will have three sections that separate entries by:



FILE NAME

DESCRIPTION

Valid entries Items currently listed in DT_COST.siz but not included in a database file Items currently not listed in DT_COST.siz but included in a database file The user can copy and paste from the DT_COST.NEW file into their DT_COST.siz to generate a file that includes entries in all database files CSA01_W.EXE See PE 8-05-1. S16-01 hot-rolled structural code DATASORT.EXE Program that arranges four specific database files into the order required by the program. The four database files that are sorted are: DT_TRIM.siz, DT_ANGL1.siz, DT_MASTC.siz, and DT_SCRW1.siz. The format for the DATASORT command line for each file is shown below (See PE 11-01-6.): C:\M BS\UTIL\DATASORT.EXE /IDT_TRIM .siz /ODT_TRIM .new C:\M BS\UTIL\DATASORT.EXE /IDT_ANGL1.siz /ODT_ANGL1.new C:\M BS\UTIL\DATASORT.EXE /IDT_M ASTC.siz /ODT_M ASTC.new C:\M BS\UTIL\DATASORT.EXE /IDT_SCRW1.siz /ODT_SCRW1.new

DESUSER.EXE

Program that uses building input information compared to user pre-sets to generate:

user warnings beyond the program warnings (see PE 1200-18), user defined variables file (USER.FLD) used on drawings and reports (see PE 12-00-19), replacement parameters for the database files, or replacement files for logos or DwgCover files (see PE 7-02-5 and PE 10-02-8) DS_CRNBM.EXE Program to calculate section properties for crane beams EC3.EXE W_CHECK strength routines for the EC3 code. EC3C.EXE C_CHECK strength routines for the EC3 code. EC3_EP.EXE Bolted End Plate design for the EC3 code. ENCRYPT.EXE Program to encrypt database and *.ini files. The encrypted format can be read by all the programs. There is not a decryption program available, nor will we make one available. EXTRACT.EXE Program that will extract the block information from a DXF file and generate a BLK file to use in the program. This is required for logos, ANDWG details, and details that are placed on the drawings other than DTDWGs. MBS_INI.EXE Program that will generate DESCTRL.ini from DESCTRL.in, or generate DESCTRL.in from DESCTRL.ini file. (see PE 9-


305

306


FILE NAME

DESCRIPTION

99-6 and PE 10-99-8) MBSUPDAT.EXE Program to update a directory from another directory. The user is prompted to overwrite newer files from the source location to the destination location. There is a switch, /A, to overwrite all without prompting. This switch is currently undocumented. (see PE 7-00-29) Replaced by Updater MOMBASE.EXE Design of base plates with moments, AISC code. PHASESL.EXE Program to divide a building into multiple phases with each phase represented by a single shipping list. See PE 2-07-7. QUOTE.BAT BAT file that copies QUOTE.XLS from a default location into the job, imports the REPORT.fld information and using a macro included in the ExCel file, places the information into the QUOTE.XLS in the job, then opens the QUOTE.XLS from the current job. Three lines are required in the BAT file: copy c:\mbs\util\quote.xls quote.xls >nul copy rep-fld.out c:\mbs\rep\rep-fld.out >nul "c:\program files\microsoft office\office\excel" QUOTE QUOTE.XLS ExCel file with macro to import REPORT.fld information. SHOP_INI.EXE Program that uses shop drawing data transfer information to generate INI file formats for the shop drawings. Files generated include:

SIZ_BDF.EXE

SPECIALD.EXE

UPDATER.EXE

TRAN.EXE V_CODE.EXE W_PROP.EXE

ASM_FAB.INI - Rigid frame assembly pieces CZE_FAB.INI - CZE items ( purlins, girts, jambs, etc) WIND_FAB.INI - Wind bents & wind columns INT_FAB.INI - Rigid frame interior columns Program that generates binary data file formats of the costing database files. This file format was used prior to the encrypted format. This format is less secure and data files information can be viewed from this program. Program to do the AISC and AISI calculations on the following programs: C_PROP, C_CHECK, W_CHECK, EndPlt, and BasePlt Program to update a directory from another directory. This program will do long file names and allows for multiple sources and destinations. This is a Windows compiled program. See PE 7-05-1 for further help. See PE 3-05-5 Translation Manager See PE 1-06-9 Roof Snow and Live Load Program for calculations of wide flange section properties, W_PROP.


Part

XIV

308


14

A7: MBS Directory Structure and File Sequence

14.1

MBS Directory Structure and File Sequence The MBS directory structure is displayed below as it appears in Microsoft Explorer. Notice that MBS and MBS_JOBS are directories on the C:\ drive and all other MBS folders are subdirectories to C: \MBS.



14.2

309

Data Flow While Running MBS MBS DIRECTORY (Data Files) BLK

MBS_JOBS DIRECTORY Default title blocks and user details - - - - ? Code dependent: Deflection limits, design loads

CODE

- - - - ? MBS Job start files, Default files

DOC2 DXF

- - - - ? Detail Drawings: Erection, Parameter, Methods, Shop - - - - ? Note files for erection drawings

NOT

- - - - ? Report forms: Contract, Letter, Ship (*.frm)

REP

- - - - ? Default SIZ files, Special SIZ files

SIZ2

- - - - ? Word translation and drawing options

TRANS

- - - - ? EXE Files for Utility programs

UTIL (Operation Files) EXE2

- - - - ? Runs all building process programs - - - - ? Runs screen operations

LIB

- - - - ? Contains Windows Help Files

HLPWIN1

- - - - ? Program to view and plot/print drawings

MINIVIEW

- - - - ? Programs to work with hardware lock

AZTECH

- - - - ? EXE Files for Windows Operations

EXEWIN1

- - - - ? Comprehensive Design Report

REPORT

- - - - ? Windows INI files

SYSTEM


- - - - ?

MBS JOBS IN PROGRESS

310

14.3


File Execution Sequence, Design Screen DESIGN SCREEN:

The simplified sequence in making the files on the design screen are illustrated above. If there were additional rigid frames, they would follow in sequence after RFDES-2.



14.4

311

File Execution Sequence, Detail Screen DETAIL SCREEN:

The simplified sequence in making the files on the detail screen are illustrated above. If there were additional rigid frames, they would follow in sequence after RFDET-2.


Part

XV

A8: MBS Install Instructions

15

A8: MBS Install Instructions

15.1

MBS Install Instructions

313

To install the MBS software on a computer that does not have MBS, do the following. 1. Start the install CD. A. Install MBS software B. Install Miniview for Windows (if not running Vista) a. use 630047 for serial number C. Install Climate Data Retrieval D. Install Comprehensive Reports (optional) E. Install TDF Editor F. Install Visual Parameter Editor G. Install Az-Tech (version 2.31) H. Install Borland Database Engine (BDE) An alternative way to install is below using the FTP_UPDATER program. Most of the steps below are done automatically by the Install CD or just a simple mouse click. A. Create a C:\MBS\UTIL\FTP_UPDATER folder B. Copy the contents of the \MBS\UTIL\FTP_UPDATER folder on the MBS FTP site to your computer, placing the files into the same folder. C. Run the FTP_UPDATER program and let it download the newest files. ** Caution: Might take a couple hours if run with a slow internet connection. D. Install Az-Tech (version 2.31) a. run SETUP_AZ_DRIVERS.exe from the MBS FTP site in the \UTILITY\AZTECH\VER231\DRIVERS folder. b. copy from the MBS FTP site in the \UTILITY\AZTECH\VER231 folder these files and place them as shown below. 1. KECHK32.dll to C:\MBS\LIB 2. The rest of the files to C:\MBS\EXE2 c. if you are using Vista, you will need to download either of the two patches from the \UTILITY\AZTECH\VISTA folder. By default, download and run the Vista-32. zip file. Note: If using a USB lock, it is okay now to plug the USB lock into your computer. E. From the \UTILITY folder, run these files. a. CDRSetup.exe installs the Climate Data Retrieval b. TDFSetup.exe installs the TDF Editor c. VPESetup.exe installs the Visual Parameter Editor d. BDESetup.exe installs the Borland Database Engine (BDE) e. CRSetup.exe (optional) installs the Comprehensive Reports After completing the install, reboot your computer. 2. Set the compatibility of your computer for the MBS program. - Right click on the MBS icon. - Select Properties, Compatibility, - Check "Run this program in compatibility mode". - Select Windows 2000. © 2011 Metal Building Software, Inc

314


- At bottom screen check "Apply" and "OK". 3. The first time you view a drawing, set up Miniview as follows. Select: Options, Default Settings, a. Directories, set your path for your Fonts, and set the Default Drawing Path as blank. b. Print Setup: select Landscape option. c. Default View: Select display Then, select Save as Default and Okay.


Part

XVI

316


16

A9: Information on the MBS Software

16.1

Information on the MBS Software 1. What is MBS? It is a software product developed for the Metal Building Industry. It does the complete engineering and cost processing of metal buildings. This processing includes: preparing building quotes, design, design calculations report, detailing, building cost, building selling price, sales contract, shop drawings, shipping list, erection drawings, inventory reduction file, and member fabrication files to be read by shop equipment software. 2. How is it used? - There are many variations, based on company past operations. The most common operations are as follows. - The staff that prepare the building quote enter the building data and have the program run the design, detailing and prepare the building selling price. They check the program output to the degree necessary and send the proposed client the sales agreement and some MBS prepared erection drawings. - Should this quote become a building order, the job is passed to an engineer to review and either approves or makes minor changes in the design and then approve. - The job is passed to someone in detailing and drafting to have MBS prepare the shop drawings, erection drawings and shipping list. The output is checked to the degree necessary. - Shipping list, shop drawings, and fabrication files are sent to the shop and erection drawings are sent to the customer. - The Design Calculation Report is sent to the building officials. 3. Goals in "time to process" a building. - One hour: to prepare a building quote. - One day: to prepare a complete set of program output: Design Calculation Report, shop drawings, shipping list, erection drawings and fabrication files. - One week: to fabricate all building components. 4. "Pass Through" buildings. - The "time to process" goals can be met if using "pass through" buildings. - A "pass through" building is one where you enter the building data and then run the MBS software and all the MBS output is in the final form for sending to the shop or the client. - Clients obtain "pass through" buildings by either using available MBS options to select the desired output, or adjusting the desired output to match the available MBS options. 5. It can be done. - The owner of one of companies that use the MBS software called to say that they had a good month in July. They had processed 206 buildings that month. I know they have only 5 employees that do all the design, detailing, shipping list, shop drawings and erection drawings. This averages to about 4 hours per building. - This clients market is buildings that can be processed as "pass through" buildings. - Most of their buildings are small, but that is not as significant as the fact that they are "pass through" buildings. 6. Building features that are included as pass through buildings.



317

- See the attached section that lists those building features. - Examine the list to see what part of your market can be processed as "pass through" buildings. 7. Increasing the percent of your market as "pass through" buildings. - What can you do to modify your desired program output to obtain more "pass through" buildings? - What must MBS do to modify the MBS output to obtain more "pass through" buildings? 8. How to process "non pass through" buildings. - Those design features that are not fully handled by MBS may be handled with the Special programs. If not, hand calculations may be necessary. - Those detailing features that are not fully handled by MBS may be handled with hand calculations. - Those drawing features that are not fully handled by MBS may be handled with AutoCAD or other electronic drafting program. - If the shipping list is not complete, the shipping list editor can modify it. 9. The role of the MBS software user. - Those that have spent time working in engineering, detailing or drawing departments know that the workers are divided into "those that do the activity" and "those that check the activity". - If you work with "pass through" buildings you are a "checker", all the "doing activity" has been done by the software. - If you work with non pass-through buildings, you are a checker on most of the activity and you do the activity on small parts of the building. 10. Building features as listed by MBMA that can be processed by MBS. - See the attached list of features. - Some of these features may require the user to edit MBS files to get the desired output.

16.2

MBS "Pass Through" Building Features (9-20-05) The MBS software will create "Pass Through" buildings that include the following Building Features. FRAMING: - Building cross section with up to 14 surfaces. - Building width and length can include up to 40 bays each. - A single bay in a wall can have up to 30 girts. - Each building can have up to 6 different rigid frames. - Each rigid frame can be unsymmetrical and have up to 20 unsymmetrical located columns and up to 60 member depths. - Sidewall columns can have fixed bases. - Interior columns can have fixed top and base connections. - Compression struts in roof. - Bolted connections for compression struts, eave struts, and purlins. - Endwall frames can be made from any combination of these members: C section, double C section, hot rolled wide flange, hot rolled channel section, or welded plate wide flange. - Open endwall, supported by others; open rigid frame endwall or open post and beam nonexpandable endwall. - Multiple soldier columns on one or both sidewalls.


318


BUILDING ACCESSORIES: - Multiple canopies at eave on sidewalls with or without soffit panels. - Multiple canopies below eave, on sidewall and endwall. - Liner panels: any height in walls. - Liner panels: roof can start and stop at any location along the building. - Multiple crane systems include auxiliary beams and columns. - Crane beams can be selected from seven types of crane beam cross sections. - Partial walls with a user selected member at the base of wall. - Multiple levels of partial wall for each wall. - Detail and draw insulation with cut diagrams. - Design and fully detail standing seam roofs. - Up to six different longitudinal or transverse partition walls. - Up to six different facia on each building. - Parapet walls: full or partial length on each wall. - Independent gable extension on each roof surface. - Wall lights and sky lights. - Select quantities from your list of standard accessories. FRAMED OPENINGS: - Walk door. - Overhead door. - Sliding door. - Door with added girt for door jambs. - Windows with jambs to floor. - Windows between girts. - Strip windows. - Completely open bay. - Wide opening for bi-fold door in the endwall. - Openings can be field located. - Openings can be framed with girts for future openings. OTHER FEATURES: - Input files and program output can be set in other languages. - User can enter additional loads on purlins, frames or columns. - Many US and international wind codes are available. - Multiple buildings: main building and multiple sidewall lean-to buildings can be processed as a single building.

16.3

MBS Processing of MBMA Complexity Buildings Type 1 - Standard Building [Fully Processed by MBS] A Standard Building is a four (4) sided structure with all four sides solid sheeted. It must have a standard load, width, and eave height. All doors, windows, and accessories are to be field located. Standard Buildings can have liner panels to the 7'4" girt at door head level. Lean-to's with solid sheeting on three sides, attached to an existing structure, and is also considered standard. The above buildings can have expandable or non-expandable endwalls. © 2011 Metal Building Software, Inc


319

Type 2 - Modified Standard Building [Features Fully Processed by MBS] - Canopy at eave on sidewall only (one or both sidewalls) - Two bay buildings - Endwall roof overhang - Standard building with standard lean-to attached - Buildings partially open for masonry and glass - Open endwall, supported by others; open rigid frame endwall or open post and beam non-expandable endwall - Linear panels - any non-standard height in walls - Unbraced columns - Alternating colors on walls (edit BOM input file) - Standard facades across one endwall and at least one full bay down each sidewall - Transverse partitions at frame lines Type 4 & 5 - Modified Building [Features Fully Processed by MBS] - Combination of different standard bay lengths - Canopy below eave height - Special eave heights - Portal frames or wind bents - Flush concealed rafter canopy - Standard building with crane - One bay buildings - Shop located accessories - Standard building with special endwall bay spacing - Transverse partitions away from frame lines and longitudinal partitions Type 6 & 7 - Special Buildings [Features Fully Processed by MBS] - Special pitch - not shown as standard in price book and engineering manual - Non-standard bay spacing - Special widths - Drop in eave heights (two buildings) - Unsymmetrical buildings - Portal frames on buildings with canopies on same side - Lean-to buildings with portal frames on same side - Bays requiring bar joist for purlins - Preparation of members for attachment of framework by others - Straight column rigid frame buildings - Jack beams - Endwall lean-to's and/or endwall canopies - Building governed by architect's specifications and/or drawings - Special slide doors - Canopies with facia - Canopies around corner © 2011 Metal Building Software, Inc

320


- Special height facia - Facia on buildings with portal frames on same side - Facia on either open endwalls or endwalls with sheeted gables - Parapet walls - Hangar door endwalls - Soldier Columns Type 8, 9 & 10 - Extra Special Buildings [Features Fully Processed by MBS] - Building requiring step columns for cranes - Buildings with gambrel roofs - Jack beams in the sidewall - Bulk storage buildings - Special case mezzanines supplied by manufacturer [These features are not on the current MBS schedule] - Hip roofs.


Part

XVII

322


17

A10: Creating and Checking the BOM Check Files

17.1

Creating and Checking the BOM Check Files 1. Press the X key for the eXtra programs and run the BOM check utility. 2. View the Angle.out check file. If any of the reported angles need to be revised or other angles added, edit the DT_ANGL1.siz file. 3. Run BOM.out with revised DT_ANGLE1.siz file. 4. Check the drawings to see that they adequately represent the angles in the building? 5. Repeat this process for bolts, mastic, screws and trim. 6. When the required data for this building is complete, revise the remainder of these files: DT_TRIM, DT_MASTIC, DT_SCREW1, and DT_ANGL1.


Part

XVIII

324


18

A11: How to Access and Download Files from the FTP Site

18.1

How To Access and Download Files from the MBS FTP Site To access the FTP site: See PE 7-00-32. Username = contact MBS Password = contact MBS Address: ftp://24.116.134.2

18.2

How To Access and Download using the MBS FTP_Updater Below is the sections on the use of the MBS FTP_Updater program. See the PE 2-07-3 for installation and configuration. Once the configuration screen has been reviewed and adjusted, test the configuration settings by clicking the CHECK FOR UPDATES button on the main form as shown below.

The user will then be prompted to enter their user name and password. Note in the following example that the username is already filled in. This is just for training and is not an actual login name. The username will be remembered by the program, however the password is not stored and must be entered each time the user attempts to login to the FTP site.

Next, the program will download the current FTP site file information to compare to the file dates from the user's current destination paths. Files which are zipped are automatically unzipped to the Destination path. Files which are not active by default (those with an N or .NEW at the end of the extension such as the CODE, DOC2, SYSTEM, etc.) still require the user to copy the file and remove the N or .NEW from the end of the extension to activate them. Once the files have been compared, a list of the results is displayed for the user as shown below.


A11: How to Access and Download Files from the FTP Site

325

NOTE: By removing the N or .NEW extension from the file this means the program will no longer see this file and thus recommend that it needs updated. This is why it is recommended to copy the file and rename the copy of the file to no longer have the .N or .NEW extension.

Each item in this list with a [+] can be expanded to see the details which show what the current results are for the files. The status will show if the file is current or newer, and the Date/Time/Size for the FTP site and the user's computer are also shown as seen below:

The user can set the program to only show the files which are newer and not have to see a list of all the files. To do this, click View from the menu bar and then select Show Only Newer as shown below. The Full Expand and the Full Collapse options will expand or collapse all of the items in the list. The expand and collapse settings are only used for the current session they are not remembered once the application is closed. Items with a check in the checkbox are updated. Files not desired to be updated should have the check removed from the checkbox by the user. © 2011 Metal Building Software, Inc

326


To update the files which are selected the user needs to click the Download Files button. Once this is done all the selected files will be downloaded from the FTP site to the destination paths and any backup directories will also be saved.


Part

XIX

328


19

A12: Continued MBS Support

19.1

Continued MBS Support Your training with MBS has been started. The training can continue by working on your own and with support from MBS. Here are some comments on continued MBS support. Continued MBS support: - Up to 3 individuals in the company, - Typically: design, detailing, drafting, - Must include clear statement of error or warning, - Must include zipped job, - E-mail to [email protected]. - Address the e-mail to the MBS staff member doing the training. If that staff member is available they will respond, else another staff member in support will respond. Option of hands on support with "GOTOMYPC". - Both companies need to be in contract with GOTOMYPC, if each is to take control, annual cost is as low as $95. - We can run jobs on each others computers and explain what is going on through the phone. - Need to arrange a time that is possible for both parties. - Client pays MBS $75 per hour for this feature.


Part

XX

330


20

A13: Using the ADD Feature

20.1

Using the Add feature to Process a Main Building with Sidewall Lean-To Building Date: August 3, 2005 1. Click on the project icon, and then click OK. 2. At the Project manager, click on Add, give the project name and press OK. At the next screen enter a building description, click on OK and respond Yes to indicate you want to create a new project. 3. At the Project Maintenance screen, with the Building List, click on Add, give the building Id of one of the buildings and press OK. Now, you need to supply information on that building, the same as if it were a stand alone building. 4. At the top of the screen, enter Description, Status and Comments as desired. At the lower part of the screen, for the DesCtrl tab, select the building start file. Press the DwgCtrl tab and select the drawing control file. Similarly, select the DataBase and JobInfo tabs if active. Then press OK. Next, you see a list of files to be copied for this building, if that is as requested, press OK. 5. Now, you are back to the Project Maintenance screen with the Building List. Repeat steps 3 and 4 for each building that is to be added. 6. When the last building has been entered, click OK and copy the files to the new project. Now the new project appears in the Project Manager. 7. Double click on the new project, edit the job information screen and press Exit. [If you get a warning on the project not being in metric units, exit the project and do not ZIP. Copy the file Metric.unt from one of the jobs and copy it to the project directory.] 8. Now you see the main project screen, MBS Project Control. Click on Building data Entry. Click on Common Data and enter that data which is common to both buildings. If some of the requested data is not common, you can change it as you enter data for each building. 9. When that data has been entered, click the X on the upper right of the screen (the small x attached to the building data entry screen, not the large X for the project) and save the changes. 10. This brings you to the main screen, go back to Building Data Entry and click on the first building. Provide the data for each of the screens. When that data has been entered, click the X on the upper right of the screen and save the changes. 11. Repeat step 10 for each building, then, go back to Building Data Entry and select Building Locator. 12. Click on a building to activate it and then rotate the building if necessary. 13. Slide the building to its new location by holding the left key down as you move the building. A red square appears at the intersection of a column and exterior wall when a snap point is available.


A13: Using the ADD Feature

331

A snap point allows the building being moved to automatically align with a snap point of the other building. The frames line up if a diamond forms at that point. When the buildings are located, press the full screen button on the top menu list. 14. Click on the Intersection tab. Click on the intersection rectangle and respond to the question on sidewall panels, then press OK at bottom of screen. Then, OK at top of screen. 15. Click on the Grid Line tab. Select starting corner and vertical and horizontal grid line preferences. Click on Calculate. See the resulting grid lines on the screen. Close the screen by pressing X in the upper right corner and save the changes. 16. The resulting screen shows a 3D drawing of the buildings. Close this building data entry screen with the X in the upper right. 17. Now you are back to the main screen, click on Auto and select Make Design Detail Drawing. This will prepare the information for the reports and for the erection drawings. 18. Click on the Project Drawings tab, right click on the tab, and select Make Page. Press the V key to view any of the drawings. 19. Click on the Project Reports tab and make page. View each report as desired.


Part

XXI

A14: Using the COPY Feature

21

A14: Using the COPY Feature

21.1

Using the Copy feature to Process Multiple Buildings

333

Date: October 4, 2005 ---PRE-PROCESS BUILDINGS--1. Run each building separately in MBS. Set the sidewall bay spacing to be the same as or a mirror of the main building. This is required to provide support for the lean-to frames. ---DEFINE PROJECT--2. Click on the project icon. At the Open Project screen, click OK to open Project Manager. 3. At the Project Manager, click on the Add button, give the New Project an ID and click OK. At the next screen enter a project description, status, and comments. Select from the four tabs at the bottom as these are the startup files for the project and buildings. The Database tab will specify the files used on each building, and cannot be changed per building. Click on OK and respond Yes to create a new project. ---SELECT BUILDINGS--4. You are ready to define each building in the project. The Project Maintenance screen displays with the Building List tab. Click on the Copy button and give the ID on the Copy Building screen for the main building and press OK. The current Description, Status, and Comments will appear and can be changed. Click OK when text is as desired. ---SELECT PROJECT--5. Now, you are back to the Project Maintenance screen with the Building List tab. Repeat step 4 for each building that is to be copied. 6. When the last building has been selected, from the Project Maintenance screen click OK and click Yes to Copy Files to New Project. The jobs will automatically unzip if needed. Now the new project appears in the Project Manager. ---LOCATE BUILDINGS--7. Double click on the new project, edit the Job Info screen and click Exit. 8. The main project screen appears, MBS Project Control. Click the Building Data Entry button to enter input information. The Project Editor screen appears. The common data and data for each building have been entered, so click on Building Locator. 9. Move, rotate, and align the buildings as necessary. A red square appears at the intersection of a column and exterior wall when a snap point is available. A snap point allows the building being moved to automatically align with a snap point of the other building. Move a building by clicking and holding down the left key of the mouse. Letting go of the mouse key will release control of moving the building. When the frames between buildings line up, a diamond forms at that point. ---DEFINE INTERSECTIONS--10. Click on the Intersection tab. Click each rectangle or triangle that appears at the intersection between buildings and respond to the questions, then click OK. © 2011 Metal Building Software, Inc

334


---DEFINE GRIDLINES--11. Click on the Grid Line tab. Select starting corner and vertical and horizontal grid line preferences. Click on Calculate. The resulting grid lines appear on the screen. Close the screen by pressing X in the upper right corner and save the changes. ---PROCESS PROJECT--12. The resulting screen shows a 3D drawing of the buildings. Close the Building Data Entry screen by clicking the X in the upper right. This will prepare the information for the Project Drawings tab. 13. Now you are back to the main screen, select Auto from the top menu and select Make Design/ Detail/Drawing. ---GENERATE OUTPUT--14. Click on the Project Reports tab to make this the active screen and generate information required to combine the buildings. Point at and right click on the tab, select Make Page. Press the V key to view the combined reports. 15. Click on the Project Drawings tab and select Make Page. Press the V key to view the combined drawings.


Copyright (c) © 2011 Metal Building Software, Inc

Metal Building Software, Inc.

Mbs Training.unlocked

Recommend Documents